Sony PXW-Z750 Operating instructions

5-011-799-14 (1)
GB
Solid-State Memory Camcorder
Operating Instructions
PXW-Z750
Software Version 3.1
© 2019 Sony Corporation
2
Table of Contents
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts............................... 3
Screen Display...................................................13
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply............................... 20
Attaching a Viewfinder.....................................21
Using the Camcorder for the First Time........... 23
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens................... 24
Preparing the Audio Input System.................. 25
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral
Devices...................................................... 26
Handling SxS Memory Cards............................ 27
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration
Data........................................................... 30
Using a Media Adaptor.....................................31
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings................................................ 32
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range............ 35
Adjusting the Black Balance and White
Balance...................................................... 36
Setting the Electronic Shutter.......................... 38
Setting Auto Iris............................................... 39
Adjusting the Audio Level...............................40
Setting Time Data............................................ 42
4. Shooting
Basic Operations..............................................44
Advanced Operations......................................46
Proxy Data.........................................................51
Planning Metadata.......................................... 53
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)............. 55
5. Network Configuration
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration
Data
User Configuration Data..................................123
Network Functions Supported by the
Camcorder................................................. 56
User Files.........................................................124
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN.......... 57
ALL Files..........................................................125
Connecting to the Internet................................61
Scene Files......................................................126
Transferring Files............................................. 65
Reference Files................................................127
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio....... 69
Lens Files........................................................128
Streaming High Quality Video......................... 70
Gamma Files...................................................129
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control..............................71
Configuring from the Web Menu..................... 73
Supported Network Functions and Operating
Limitations................................................ 78
6. Clip Operations
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit..................130
Connecting an External Monitor.....................134
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer......135
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen....... 79
Configuring a Shooting and Recording
System...................................................... 137
Thumbnail Menu............................................. 85
Recording External Input Signals................... 140
7. Menu Display and Settings
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Setup Menu Organization................................86
Maintenance................................................... 141
Basic Setup Menu Operations..........................88
Error/Warning System....................................142
Editing the User Menu.....................................90
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)..... 92
Operation Menu............................................... 93
Paint Menu......................................................102
Maintenance Menu.........................................107
File Menu........................................................ 118
Assigning Functions to Assignable
Switches...................................................120
11. Appendix
Messages Displayed During Operation..........145
Items Saved in User Data................................ 151
Special Recording Support by Recording
Format...................................................... 161
Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings....................162
Media Recording and Playback Time..............163
Usage Precautions......................................... 164
Specifications................................................. 166
3
1. Overview
Name and Function of Parts
4. DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector
Power Supply
(4-pin, female)
Supplies power for the CBK-DL1 USB Adaptor
and HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A).
6
5. Battery attachment shoe
Attach a BP-GL95B Battery Pack. Alternatively,
you can attach an AC-DN10A AC Adaptor to
operate the camcorder from an AC power
supply.
“Preparing a Power Supply” (page 20)
[Note]
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-GL95B
Battery Pack.
6. Camera adaptor connector (Japanese
model only)
Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD
Camera Adaptor. To connect an adaptor,
remove the cover.
[Note]
Not supported in the return video display by the
camcorder.
1
2
1. LIGHT (video light) switch
Determines how a video light connected to
the LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on
and off.
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video
light is in the on position, the video light
is turned on automatically while the
camcorder is recording.
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off
manually, using its own switch.
3 4
5
[Note]
When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache
Rec mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before
operation to start recording is carried out (or while data
is being stored in memory).
2. POWER switch
Turns the main power supply on () and off
().
3. DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR
type, 4-pin, male)
4
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
8. Lens mount securing rubber
Accessory Attachments
1
2
After locking the lens in position using the
lens locking lever, fit this rubber over the
lower of the two projections. This fixes the
lens mount, preventing it from coming loose.
3 45
Controls Near the Lens
9. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
knob (page 21)
10. Attachment for optional microphone
holder and attachment for supplied guard
(page 25, page 57)
11. LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin,
9
6
7
8
10
11
12. Shoulder pad (page 26)
13. Lens cable clamp
Clamps the lens cable.
14. MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V)
connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female)
Connect a stereo microphone to this
connector. The power (+48 V) is supplied via
this connector.
15. LENS connector (12-pin) (page 24)
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
16. Tripod mount
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1. Wireless receiver insertion slot
(page 25)
“Attaching a Wireless Receiver” (page 25)
2. Shoulder strap fitting (page 26)
6. Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 21)
7. VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin round
type)
The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for
connection of an HDVF series viewfinder.
3. Accessory shoe (page 26)
[Note]
4. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning
When connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to
this connector, power off the camcorder first.
lever (page 21)
5. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring
(page 21)
3
female) (page 26)
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach
the tripod adaptor (optional).
17. Lens mount (special bayonet mount)
(page 24)
18. Lens locking lever (page 24)
19. Lens mount cap
Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up.
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted
for protection from dust.
1
4
5
2
6
1. REC START (recording start) button
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop
recording. The operation is the same as that of
the VTR button on the lens.
2. SHUTTER switch
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to
SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter
mode setting. When this switch is operated,
the new setting appears on the viewfinder
screen for about three seconds.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 38)
3. FILTER knob
Switches between four ND filters built into this
camcorder.
5
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
When this selector is used, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about
three seconds.
FILTER knob
setting
ND filter
1
CLEAR
2
1/4 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/4)
3
1/16 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/16)
4
1/64 ND (attenuates light to
approximately 1/64)
BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance
automatically.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even
when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)
function is operating.
If you push the switch to the WHITE side once
more during the automatic white balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and
the white balance setting returns to the
original setting.
If you push the switch to the BLACK side once
more during the automatic black balance
adjustment, the adjustment is canceled
and the black balance setting returns to the
original setting.
LCD Monitor Side (1)
1
2
3
4
5
6. MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob
(page 40)
You can change a Maintenance menu setting
so that different white balance settings can be
stored for different FILTER knob positions. This
allows you to automatically obtain optimum
white balance for the current shooting
conditions in linkage with the filter selection.
“Adjusting the White Balance” (page 36)
4. MENU knob (page 88)
5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black
balance adjustment) switch
Activates the automatic white/black balance
adjustment functions.
WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically.
If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is
set to A or B, the white balance setting
is stored in the corresponding memory.
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST,
the automatic white balance adjustment
function does not operate.
6
10 12
789
11
12
13
14
6
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
1. ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches
5. MONITOR (audio monitor selection)
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 120).
The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with
an indicator to show whether a function is
assigned to the switch (ON) or not (OFF).
switches
By means of combinations of the two
switches, you can select audio that you
want to hear through the built-in speaker or
earphones.
2. ONLINE button
When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2
When network client mode or the streaming
function is assigned to this button, press and
hold until the indicator is lit orange. Then,
press the button again, turning the indicator
blue, to enable network client mode or the
streaming function.
To exit the enabled function, press and hold
the button until the indicator turns off.
The button can also be used as an assignable
switch when assigned with functions other
than those above (page 121).
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 1 audio
MIX
Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio
(stereo)a)
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 2 audio
ALARM
Minimum
Maximum
4. MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the sound other than
the warning tone that is output via the builtin speaker or earphones. When the knob is
turned to the minimum position, no sound can
be heard.
8. OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic
contrast control) switch
Switches the video signal output from the
camera module, between the following two.
BARS: Output the color bar signal.
CAM: Output the video signal being shot.
When this is selected, you can switch DCC 1)
on and off.
Upper switch
Audio output
CH-1/CH-3
Channel 3 audio
MIX
Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio
(stereo)a)
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very
bright background with the iris opening adjusted
to the subject, objects in the background will be
lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the
high intensity and restore much of the lost detail. It
is particularly effective for shooting in the following
cases.
ˎˎ Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day
ˎˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background
through a window
ˎˎ Any high contrast scene
CH-2/CH-4
Channel 4 audio
9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory)
When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4
3. ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment)
knob
Controls the volume of the warning tone that
is output via the built-in speaker or optional
earphones. When the knob is turned to the
minimum position, no sound can be heard.
However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm
Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the
alarm tone is audible even when this volume
control is at the minimum position.
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting
appears on the viewfinder screen for about
three seconds.
a)By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE
jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance
>Audio >Headphone Out in the setup menu must be
set to Stereo.)
6. ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 120).
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
This is a momentary type switch. Each press of
the switch turns the function assigned to this
switch on or off.
7. GAIN switch
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to
match the lighting conditions during shooting.
The gain values corresponding to the L, M, and
H settings can be selected using Operation
>Gain Switch in the setup menu (page 97)
(factory settings are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and
H=12 dB).
switch
Controls adjustment of the white balance.
PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the
preset value (the factory default setting:
3200K). Use this setting when you have no
time to adjust the white balance.
A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment
settings already stored in A or B. Push the
AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the
WHITE position to automatically adjust the
white balance and save the adjustment
settings in memory A or memory B.
B (ATW 1)):When this switch is set to B and
Operation >White Setting >White Switch
<B> is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW
is activated.
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch
even when ATW is in use.
When this switch is adjusted, the new
setting appears on the viewfinder screen
for about three seconds.
1)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance
of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for
varying lighting conditions.
[Note]
It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate
colors using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject
conditions.
Examples:
ˎˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as
sky, sea, ground, or flowers.
ˎˎ When the subject is under a light source of extremely
high or extremely low color temperature.
If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW
function takes an unacceptably long time
or only results in an inadequate effect, then
execute the AWB function.
10. Switch cover
Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF
switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch.
11. MENU ON/OFF switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch is used to display the menu on the
viewfinder screen or the test signal screen.
Each time the switch is pushed down, the
menu screen is turned on and off.
The function of this switch is the same as that
of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen
operations section.
[Note]
It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing
the cover.
12. MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE
switch
To use the switch, open the cover.
This switch has different functions depending
on whether or not a menu is displayed.
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this
position after a setting is changed in the
setup menu displays the message to
confirm whether the previous settings
7
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
are canceled. Pushing this switch up to
this position again cancels the previous
settings.
Pushing this switch up to this position
before a setting is changed in the setup
menu or after a setting change is canceled
in the setup menu displays the message to
confirm whether the setting is reset to the
initial value. Pushing this switch up to this
position again resets the settings to the
initial value.
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu
page, which has a hierarchical structure, is
opened. Each time the switch is pushed to
this position, the page returns to one stage
higher in the hierarchy.
1. Built-in speaker
LCD Monitor Side (2)
[2]
[1]
7
8
9
1)E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode,
video and audio signals input to the camcorder are
output after passing through internal electric circuits
only. This can be used to check input signals.
2. LCD monitor
10 11 12
Use the switch in the following way when the
menu is not displayed.
CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is
pushed upward, a window to confirm
the menu settings and status of the
camcorder appears on the viewfinder
screen (page 13). The window consists
of several pages, which are switched each
time the switch is pushed upward.
ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch
down to the OFF position.
Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining
media capacity, audio levels, time data, and
so on. It also allows you to check camera and
playback pictures (page 13).
You can adjust the position and angle of the
LCD monitor.
1
2
3
4
5
13. UTILITY SD card slot
Insert an SD card for saving camcorder
settings.
3. WARNING indicator
6
14. ACCESS indicator
Lights up orange when the SD card is being
accessed.
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1)
sound during recording, and playback
sound during playback. The speaker also
sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings
(page 142).
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE
jack, the speaker output is suppressed
automatically.
13
14
15
16
Lights up or flashes when an abnormality
occurs (page 142).
17
4. ACCESS indicator
Lights up in blue when data is written to or
read from the recording media.
5. Audio control section (page 9)
6. Thumbnail screen operation section
(page 9)
7. F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator
This plays back at high speed in the reverse
direction. The playback speed changes in the
8
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
order ×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the reverse direction.
8. PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator
Press this button to view playback video
images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD
monitor. The indicator lights during playback.
Press this button again during playback to
pause, outputting a still image. At this time
the indicator flashes at a rate of once per
second.
Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during
playback or pause starts high speed playback
in the forward or reverse direction.
Display indication
Description
Video with
superimposed
information (CHAR)
The LCD monitor displays
the same text information
as the viewfinder.
Video without
superimposed
information (MONI)
Only the video appears.
Status display
(STATUS)
(page 13)
Counters, warnings, audio
levels, and similar
information appear. No
video image appears.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
DISPLAY switch:
U-BIT
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset user bits data a) to
00:00:00:00.
The EXPAND button function will be supported
in a future upgrade.
a)Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on
the media, those bits which can be used to record
useful information for the user such as scene number,
shooting place, etc.
14. HOLD (display hold) button
“Setting Time Data” (page 42)
This plays back at high speed in the forward
direction. The playback speed changes in the
order ×4  ×15  ×24 with each press of the
button. The indicator lights during high-speed
playback in the forward direction.
Pressing this button instantly freezes the
time data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The
timecode generator continues running.)
Pressing this button again releases the hold.
This button returns to the previous screen
when pressed during thumbnail screen display
or essence mark thumbnail screen display.
For details about the time data display, see page 13.
10. PREV (previous) button
15. RESET/RETURN button
This cycles the data displayed in the time
data display in the LCD monitor through
the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT
(page 13).
COUNTER: Display recording/playback
duration counter.
TC: Display timecode.
U-BIT: Display user bits data.
9. F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator
This jumps to the first frame of the current clip.
If you press this together with the F REV
button, the jump is to the first frame of the
first recorded clip on the recording media.
If you press this button twice in rapid
succession, the jump is to the first frame of the
preceding clip (or the first frame of the current
clip when no preceding clips exist).
11. STOP button
Press this button to stop playback.
12. NEXT button
This jumps to the first frame of the next clip.
If you press this together with the F FWD
button, the jump is to the last frame of the last
recorded clip on the recording media.
13. DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND
(expand function) button
With each press of this button, the display in
the LCD monitor changes as follows.
Resets the value shown in the time data
display in the LCD monitor. According to the
settings of the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch
(page 9) and the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch
(page 9), this button resets the display as
follows.
Switch settings
RESET/RETURN button
operation
DISPLAY switch:
COUNTER
Reset counter to
00:00:00:00.
DISPLAY switch:
TC
PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch:
PRESET
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN
switch:
SET
Reset timecode to
00:00:00:00.
16. DISPLAY switch
17. BRIGHT (brightness) button
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
Each press of the button selects the next
setting in the order shown in the following
table. If you press the button with the LCD
monitor off, the LCD backlight comes on in the
H state.
Setting
LCD monitor backlight
H
High (select this to view the LCD
monitor outdoors in the daytime)
M
Brightness between H and L
L
Low (select this to view the LCD
monitor indoors or outdoors at night)
OFF
Off (the display is also off)
9
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
7. AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4
adjustment method selection) switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 3 and 4.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
8. ESSENCE MARK button
8
9
1011
12
1. Thumbnail indicator
5. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/
This lights when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
recording run) switch
Selects the operating mode of the internal
timecode generator. The operating mode is
set as explained below, depending on the
position of the switch.
F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless
of whether the camcorder is recording.
Use this setting when synchronizing the
timecode with external timecode.
SET: Sets the timecode or user bits.
R-RUN: Timecode advances only during
recording. Use this setting to have a
consecutive timecode on the recording
media.
2. THUMBNAIL button
Press this button to display the thumbnail
screen (page 79) and to carry out a
thumbnail operation.
Press once more to return to the original
display.
3. SET button and arrow buttons
Use these buttons to make timecode and
user bit settings, and for thumbnail screen
operations.
When the menu is displayed, press this button
to select an item or to confirm the setting
change.
“Setting the Timecode” (page 42)
4. MENU button
“Setting the User Bits” (page 42)
Each press of this button turns the setup
menu display on and off.
The function of this button is the same as that
of the MENU ON/OFF switch.
6. LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel
1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs
Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT
CH1/CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches
are set to MANUAL.
By pressing this button when a thumbnail
display is on the screen, you can view the
following thumbnail displays of the essencemarked frames of the selected clip, depending
on the item selected in a list displayed on the
screen.
All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked
with essence marks.
Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked
with Rec Start marks and of the first frames
of clips (when the first frames are not
marked with Rec Start marks).
Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 1.
Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames
marked with Shot Mark 2.
You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark
3 to Shot Mark 9.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata
that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot
mark 9, the selection options in the list are
displayed by the defined names.
9. SHIFT button
Use this in combination with other buttons.
10. PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK
switch
Selects the type of timecode to record.
PRESET: Record new timecode on the media.
REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the
existing timecode recorded on the media.
Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates
in R-RUN mode.
CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the
internal clock. Regardless of the setting
of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the
camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.
11. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel
1/2 adjustment method selection)
switches
Select the audio level adjustment method for
audio channels 1 and 2.
AUTO: Automatic adjustment
MANUAL: Manual adjustment
12. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio
channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches
Select the audio input signals to be recorded
on audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
FRONT: Audio input signals from the
microphone connected to the MIC IN
connector
REAR: Audio input signals from an audio
device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/
CH-2 connectors
WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF
portable tuner if it is attached
10
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
Handle and Memory Card Slot Side
9. Network connector
[Note]
Connects to a network via a wired LAN
connection using a LAN cable (sold
separately).
Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS
function is in use.
SxS memory card slots (page 27)
654 3
“Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 55)
2
3. PC connector
1
7
8
9
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for
peripheral device wiring that might have excessive
voltage to this port.
Follow the instructions for this port.
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to
peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to
prevent malfunction due to radiation noise.
4. External device connector
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 61)
Connect to a PSZ-HA/HB/HC series Portable
Storage HDD (option), PSZ-SA25 Portable
Storage SSD (option), a general-purpose
external USB HDD, or USB flash drive to copy
clips from the recording media inserted in an
SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media.
10. HDMI connector
[Note]
[Note]
This connector should be used only for connecting the
type of devices above. It cannot be used for connecting
a USB hub or other devices.
5. USB wireless LAN module connector
10
11
Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN
Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN
Adaptor (option), CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor
Kit (option), or modem (option) to enable
communications with wireless LAN devices
and networks.
12
1. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches
You can assign a function using Operation
>Assignable Switch in the setup menu
(page 121).
2. GPS module
Contains a built-in GPS module.
11. GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input)
connector (BNC type)
This connector inputs a reference signal
when the camcorder is to be genlocked or
when timecode is to be synchronized with
external equipment. The supported reference
signals vary depending on the current system
frequency as shown in the following table.
Supported reference signals
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 61)
59.94i
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
6. PROXY SD card slot (page 51)
59.94P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
50i
1080/50i, 576/50i
50P
1080/50i, 576/50i
29.97P
1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i
25P
1080/50i, 576/50i
23.98P
1080/23.98PsF
(NFC) mark
A built-in NFC antenna is provided.
Off is assigned to these switches when the
camcorder is shipped from the factory.
SD output is not supported.
System
frequency
7.
14
Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor
or recording unit, to output QFHD or HD video
and audio signals.
Use a commercially available high-speed
HDMI cable for connection.
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 57)
Insert an SD card for recording proxy data.
13
[CAUTION]
Used to put this camcorder into USB
connection mode and use it as an external
storage device for a computer. When a
computer is connected to this connector, every
memory card inserted in the camcorder is
recognized as a drive on the computer.
8. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select)
button
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both
card slots A and B, press this button to select
the card you want to use (page 28).
11
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
12. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC
type)
To apply an external lock to the timecode of
the camcorder, input the reference timecode.
1. TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)
Tally Indicator and Connector Section
Lights up during recording. It will not light if
the TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes
when the WARNING indicator operates. The
tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder
and the REC indication on the viewfinder
screen light or flash in the same manner.
1
“Setting the Timecode” (page 42)
2
13. SYNC OUT connector (BNC type)
Outputs a tri-level sync signal for
synchronizing other devices.
“Error/Warning System” (page 142)
2. TALLY switch
14. TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator
function.
type)
To lock the timecode of an external VTR to
the timecode of this camcorder, connect this
connector to the external VTR’s timecode
input connector.
3. EARPHONE jack (stereo, mini jack)
You can monitor the E-E sound during
recording and playback sound during
playback. When an alarm is indicated, you
can hear the alarm sound through the
earphone. Plugging an earphone into the jack
automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.
You can select monaural or stereo using
Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the
setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Use monaural (2-pole) or stereo (3-pole) type
earphones. Use of other earphones may damage the
camcorder.
ˎˎ Use earphones with 16 Ω impedance.
3
4
5
6
4. AUDIO IN selector switch
Select the audio source you connect to the
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.
LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or
other external audio signal source
AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital
audio signal source
MIC: When connecting a microphone.
5. +48V/OFF (+48V external power source
7
8
9
10 1 11
on/off) switch
Switch between the following settings,
according to the microphone used for audio
input.
+48V: Microphone requiring external power
source (phantom power)
12
1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts
OFF: Microphone using internal power source
or not requiring a power source
6. REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a remote control unit to control the
camcorder remotely.
[Note]
Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control
Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the
camcorder POWER switch.
7. SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type)
Outputs a 12G/3G/HD signal (with embedded
audio). The output signal from this connector
can be turned on/off using Operation >Input/
Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2 Output
in the setup menu.
Use a commercially available 75 Ω coaxial
cable for connection.
[Note]
Make sure that the ground connection between the
camcorder and external device is securely established
before turning the power on.
(It is recommended that the camcorder and external
device be turned on after connecting the 75 Ω coaxial
cable.)
If the external device must be connected to the
camcorder while the camcorder is on, connect the
75 Ω coaxial cable to the external device first and then
connect it to the camcorder.
8. Bottom cover
This is provided for protecting the cables
connected to the connectors on the rear
panel.
By loosening the screws which retain the
cover to the bottom of the camcorder, you can
adjust the position of the cover depending
on the size and shape of the microphone or
audio cable plugs. After adjusting the position,
tighten the screws to secure the cover.
9. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and
channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type,
3-pin, female)
Connect to audio equipment or a microphone.
10. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin,
male)
Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.
The audio signals are selected by the
MONITOR switch.
11. SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type)
Connector used when connecting an external
SDI signal source to the camcorder.
13
1. Overview
Screen Display
10. Clip name display
LCD Monitor Information Screen (Status Display)
Displays the name of the clip currently
recording when recording, or displays the
name of the next clip to be recorded during
recording standby.
The LCD monitor information screen is
displayed by pressing the DISP SEL/EXPAND
(display select/expand) button (page 8).
11. Time data display
1 23 4 5
12 13
9
11
10
6
8
7
1. File system indicator
Indicator
Recording format
2. File format indicator
16bit
HD420 HQ
24bit
HD422 50
XAVC Intra
XAVC Long
3. Status display
PB: Appears during media playback.
NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode
is selected.
EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode
generator is locked to an external signal
input to the TC IN (timecode input)
connector.
HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of
the internal timecode generator is set to
R-RUN and stopped.
4. System frequency indicator
Indicates the system frequency of video being
currently played or recorded.
5. Audio format indicator
Indicates the audio recording format or the
audio format of clip being currently played.
6. Audio level meters
Indicates the audio recording or playback
levels of channels 1 to 4.
Switches displays of duration, timecode, and
user bits data, depending on the position of
the DISPLAY switch.
Displays the type of data currently shown in
the time data display, as follows.
TCG: Recorded timecode
TCR: Playback timecode
UBG: Recorded user bits
UBR; Playback user bits
CNT: Counter
DUR: Duration
CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/
CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK)
When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the
timecode value, the timecode is displayed
in the format shown below. When the HOLD
button is pressed again to release the hold,
the timecode is displayed in the normal
format.
The three dots indicate that the timecode
and counter progress are in hold mode.
12. Resolution indicator
7. Remaining battery capacity indicator
Indicates the resolution of the output video.
Displays the battery remaining capacity icon
and the remaining recording time.
13. Recording format indicator
8. Remaining media capacity indicator
Shows bar segments indicating the remaining
capacity of recording media in the slots.
9. Warning indicator area
Displays warnings when trouble with
recording occurs.
For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 142).
Indicates the current recording format or
the recording format of clip being currently
played.
Status Screens
The status screens allow you to check
camcorder settings and various types of status
information.
When no menu is displayed, push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the
CANCEL/PRST position to display the status
screen. Each push selects the next status
screen.
The following status screens can be displayed.
Status screen
Display indication
Camera Status Settings and status information
screen
related to shooting
Audio Status
screen
Settings and status information
related to audio input and
output
System Status Settings and status information
screen
related to recording
Video Output
Status screen
Settings and status information
related to video output
Assignable
Button Status
screen
Names of functions assigned to
assignable switches
Battery Status Status of the battery mounted
screen
on the camcorder
Media Status
screen
Status information about
recording media
Network
Status 1
screen
Settings and status information
related to the network
Network
Status 2
screen
Settings and status information
related to streaming
14
1. Overview: Screen Display
Camera Status screen
Display item
Description
CH 1/CH 2/CH
3/CH 4
Audio level, input source,
reference input level, and wind
noise reduction filter settings
for each channel
Video Output Status screen
System Status screen
Display item
Gain
Description
Display item
Description
Gain level in dB units
When Operation >Base Setting
>High Sensitivity Mode in the
setup menu is set to On, a
icon is displayed to the right of
the dB gain increase.
SDI
SDI OUT connector output
settings (output picture size,
output rate, mapping, HDR/
SDR, superimposition)
HDMI
HDMI connector output settings
(output picture size, mapping,
HDR/SDR, superimposition)
Electronic shutter status
Display item
Description
Gamma
Gamma category and curve
System frequency
HDR Gamma
HDR gamma setting
White
White balance mode setting
System
Frequency
File System
File system
HDR color space setting
Gain Switch
GAIN switch status
HDR Color
Space
Rec Format
Recording format
Zebra
Zebra pattern status
Iris
Iris f-stop value
Clip Continuous Rec function
on/off setting
Focal Length
Focal length
Clip
Continuous
Rec
Focus
Distance
Focus distance
Title Prefix
Clip name prefix
Picture Size
Picture size
Simul Rec
2-slot Simul Rec function on/off
setting
Rec Function
Enabled special recording
format and settings
Picture Cache
Rec
Picture Cache Rec function on/
off setting
Number
Clip name suffix
Gamma
Gamma category in use
4K&HD (Sub)
Rec
1-slot Simul Rec function on/off
setting
XAVC Proxy
Rec
Proxy data recording function
on/off setting
Shutter
Depth Of Field Depth of field
Zoom Speed
Zoom speed configured for the
lens ZOOM button
Audio Status screen
Display item
Description
Detected
Battery
Detected type of the battery
Remaining
Remaining capacity (%)
Charge Count
Number of recharges
Capacity
Remaining capacity (Ah)
Voltage
Voltage
Manufacture
Date
Date of battery manufacture
Power Source
Power supply source
Supplied
Voltage
Supplied power source voltage
Media Status screen
Assignable Button Status screen
Battery Status screen
Display item
Description
SxSA
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display)
and media life of media in slot
A (0% to 100% indication.
Replacement recommended at
0%. Displayed only for media
that supports this function.)
SxSB
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display)
and media life of media in slot
B (0% to 100% indication.
Replacement recommended at
0%. Displayed only for media
that supports this function.)
SD Proxy
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining time display)
and media life (displayed only if
available) of media in PROXY SD
card slot
15
1. Overview: Screen Display
Display item
Description
Display item
Description
Network client mode status
SD Utility
Remaining capacity (bar graph
and remaining capacity) and
media life (displayed only if
available) of media in UTILITY
SD card slot
IP Address
(Wired)
IP address of wired LAN
connection
Status
display
State
Off
CCM not
Network client mode
connected is off.
Connected
CCM
Network client mode
connected is on, CCM is
connected, and CCM
control is enabled.
Connecting
Connecting
Attempting to connect
to CCM
to CCM (or
(disconnected) disconnecting). Wait
until connection
(disconnection) is
successful. If the
status does not
change from
“Connecting,” the CCM
address setting may
be incorrect. Check
that the address is set
correctly.
Awaiting
CCM
Network client mode
connection is on, but the network
standby
setting is off. Enable
the network setting to
connect to the CCM.
Address
Error
CCM
address
error
Network Status 2 screen
A
mark is displayed if the media is
protected.
Network Status 1 screen
Display item
Description
NW Client
Mode Status
Network client mode status
For details about the status, see
“Network client mode status”
(page 15).
CCM Name
Name of the connected CCM
when using network client
mode
Streaming
Status
Streaming distribution status
Streaming
Size
Picture size of the currently
selected streaming setting
Streaming Bit
Rate
Bit rate of the currently selected
streaming setting
Streaming
Type
Type of the currently selected
streaming setting
Display item
Description
Setting
Network setting status
Wireless
Network
Wireless network setting status
Device Name
Name of attached USB wireless
LAN module device
IP Address
(Wireless)
IP address of wireless LAN
connection
MAC Addr.
(Wireless)
MAC address of device attached
the USB wireless LAN module
connector
Wireless
Network
Modem setting status
Streaming
Dest. Add.
Streaming destination address
Device Name
Name of attached modem
device
Streaming
Dest. Port
Streaming destination port
IP Address
(Modem)
IP address of attached modem
device
Number of
Distribution
Number of streaming
distribution destinations
Wired LAN
Wired LAN network connection
status
File Transfer
File transfer progress status
Transfer to:
Wired LAN
Remote
Remote control enabled/
disabled state when connected
using a LAN cable
Server name of file transfer
destination
Auth. Failed CCM user
name/
password
error
No Inet
Access
Description
The host name or IP
address of the CCM to
connect may be
incorrect. Check that
the setting is correct.
The user name or
password used to
connect to the CCM
may be incorrect.
Check that the setting
is correct.
Internet
Cannot connect to the
connection network. The network
error
settings may be
incorrect. Check the
network settings.
Status
display
State
Description
Cert. not
Valid
CCM
certification
not valid
error
The CCM certificate is
not valid. The date
setting may be invalid.
Check the date
setting.
16
1. Overview: Screen Display
Viewfinder Screen
The viewfinder screen displays images during
shooting (recording or recording standby)
and playback with camcorder information
superimposed on the display.
You can toggle the display of information on/
7
1 23 4 5 6
8
off using the DISPLAY switch.
The information to display is linked to the
settings in Operation >Super Impose in
the setup menu, and the settings of the
corresponding switches.
9
10 11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 20
21
23 22
24
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28 27 26
25
1. Extender indicator
5. Iris position indicator (with lens mounted)
“EX” appears when the lens extender function
is ON.
Displays the iris position setting.
2. Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted)
Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens
in the range 0 to 99.
The values displayed will vary with the lens used.
6. Electric color temperature filter indicator
Appears when the CC5600K function is on.
7. Depth of field indicator (serial lens
Displays the color temperature of the white
balance.
mounted)
Displays the depth of field using a bar. The
units for display are set using Operation
>Display On/Off >Lens Info in the setup menu,
and can be set to meters or feet.
4. Focus position indicator (with lens mounted)
8. Recording mode indicator
Displays the focus position as a distance to
the subject (unit: meters).
Displays the following recording operation
states of the camcorder.
3. Color temperature indicator
9. Wireless receiver function indicator
Indicator
Meaning
Rec
During recording
Stby
Recording standby
Cont Rec
Clip continuous recording in
progress
Cont Stby
Recording standby in clip
continuous recording mode
S&Q Rec
Recording in progress in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
S&Q Stby
Recording standby in Slow &
Quick Motion mode
HFR Rec
Recording in high frame rate
mode.
HFR Stby
Recording standby in high frame
rate mode.
Rec
Recording in Picture Cache Rec
mode
Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is
attached to the camcorder, and displays the
reception level for each channel that can be
used by the receiver (1ch, 2ch, or 4ch).
Normal: Displays the strength of the received
signal level by the number of white
segment indicators.
Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error
rate warning: Displays the strength of the
received signal level by the number of gray
segment indicators.
If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays
“P” in place of the indicator.1)
If the transmitter is in power-save mode: “S” is
displayed.
Receiver battery is low: The corresponding
channel number and indicators flash.1)
Cache
Recording standby in Picture
Cache Rec mode
10. S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate
Int Rec
Recording in progress in Interval
Rec mode
Int Stby
Recording standby in Interval Rec
mode
Int Stby
Recording paused in Interval Rec
mode (during pause intervals)
Sml Rec
Recording in progress in Simul
Rec mode
Sml Stby
Recording standby in Simul Rec
mode
CALL
Call received from external
connected device
Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is
in the following states.
ˎˎMaintenance >Camera Config >HD SDI
Remote I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup
menu and a recording control signal is
output from the SDI OUT connector.
ˎˎGreen tally signal received (when a camera
adaptor (connection supported on Japanese
model only) is mounted on the camcorder
and a camera extension unit is connected)
1)When using the DWR-S02DN (option)
indicator
Displays the shooting frame rate when the
camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion
recording mode.
11. GPS indicator (page 55)
12. Battery capacity/voltage display
Displays the following indicators according to
the type of battery power source.
Battery type
Indicator
Info battery
Battery remaining capacity
icon and remaining
recording time
Anton/Bauer
battery
Remaining battery capacity
(% indicator)
Other batteries
Input voltage
13. Recording format (picture size) indicator
Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto
SxS memory cards.
17
1. Overview: Screen Display
14. Recording format (system frequency and
scan method) indicator
Displays the currently configured camcorder
system frequency and the recording format
scan method.
15. Recording format (codec) indicator / 1-slot
Simul Rec indicator
Displays the format name of clips recorded
onto SxS memory cards.
“/Sub” is displayed in 1-slot Simul Rec mode
(page 49).
The following are displayed when Operation
>Base Setting >Shooting Mode in the setup
menu is set to HDR and Operation >Display
On/Off >Gamma is set to On.
Menu settings
Operation >HDR
Setting
Paint >Gamma
4K(QFHD)
Rec/Out
HD Rec/
Out
Gamma
Gamma
Select
HDR
(HLG)
HDR
(HLG)
–
–
SDR
16. Gamma indicator
Display the gamma setting.
Menu settings
Indicator
Indicator
Menu settings
Indicator
18. Wired LAN/Modem connection status
Wired LAN settings/connection status
Operation >HDR
Setting
Paint >Gamma
4K(QFHD)
Rec/Out
HD Rec/
Out
Gamma
Gamma
Select
HDR
(S-Log3)
SDR
Off
–
S-Log3
On
STD1
DVW
S-Log3
STD1
HLG
STD2 ×4.5 S-Log3
STD2
Off
–
HLG
STD3 ×3.5 S-Log3
STD3
On
STD1
DVW
HLG
STD1
STD4
240M
S-Log3
STD4
STD2 ×4.5 HLG
STD2
STD5
R709
S-Log3
STD5
STD3 ×3.5 HLG
STD3
STD6 ×5.0 S-Log3
STD6
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Gamma
Paint >Gamma setting
Gamma
Gamma
Category
Gamma
Select
Off
–
–
–
–
STD4
240M
HLG
STD4
HG1
3250G36
S-Log3
HG1
On
Off
–
–
Gamma
Off
STD5
R709
HLG
STD5
HG2
4600G30
S-Log3
HG2
On
STD
STD1 DVW
STD1
STD2 x4.5
STD2
STD6 ×5.0 HLG
STD6
HG3
3259G40
S-Log3
HG3
STD3 x3.5
STD3
HLG HG1
STD4
240M
STD4
HG1
3250G36
HG4
4609G33
S-Log3
HG4
HG2
4600G30
HLG
HG2
User 1
S-Log3
User1
HG3
3259G40
HLG
HG3
User 2
S-Log3
User2
HG4
4609G33
HLG
HG4
User 3
S-Log3
User3
User 1
HLG
User1
User 4
S-Log3
User4
User 2
HLG
User2
User 5
S-Log3
User5
User 3
HLG
User3
17. Timecode external lock indicator
User 4
HLG
User4
Displays timecode lock when the timecode is
input from an external source.
User 5
HLG
User5
STD5 R709 STD5
HG
On
On
User
STD6 x5.0
STD6
HG1
3250G36
HG1
HG2
4600G30
HG2
HG3
3259G40
HG3
HG4
4609G33
HG4
User 1
User 1
User 2
User 2
User 3
User 3
User 4
User 4
User 5
User 5
indicator
Displays icons for the wired LAN network or
modem settings/connection status.
State
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
>Wired LAN
Network
connection
state/icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
On
–
–
Disable
–
Enable
Connecting
to LAN
(flashing)
Connected
to LAN
LAN
connection
error
3G/4G modem settings/connection status
State
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
>Modem
Network
connection
state/icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
18
1. Overview: Screen Display
State
Network
connection
state/icon
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
>Modem
On
On
–
–
Off
–
On
Modem
connecting
The following icons are displayed when
streaming from a CCM.
State
Streaming
Operation Maintenance Maintenance state/Icon
>Display
>Streaming
>Network
On/Off
>Setting
Client Mode
>Streaming
>Setting
Status
On
Off
On
(flashing)
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
>Wi-Fi Mode
On
Wi-Fi Station
Not
streaming
Network
connection
state/icon
Connecting
to Wi-Fi
(flashing)
Searching
for access
points
Streaming
Modem
connected
Modem
connection
error
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
On
23. Network client mode indicator
Displays the status of the connection to the
CCM (Connection Control Manager) of either
a Network RX Station or C3 Portal using icons
when network client mode is on.
State
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
State
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
–
–
On
CCM
connected
Connecting
to access
point
[Note]
Icons are not displayed before streaming starts.
Connecting to
CCM
(disconnected) (flashing)
20.Wi-Fi mode status indicator
CCM
–
connection
standby
Displays the wireless LAN settings and
connection status using icons.
19. Streaming indicator
Displays the status of streaming using icons.
State
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Streaming
Status
Maintenance
>Streaming
>Setting
Maintenance
>Network
Client Mode
>Setting
Streaming
state/Icon
Off
–
–
–
On
Off
Off
–
On
Off
Not
streaming
Streaming
Error
Operation
>Display
On/Off
>Network
Condition
Off
On
State
Maintenance
>Network
>Setting
–
Off
On
Maintenance
>Network
>Wi-Fi Mode
–
–
Wi-Fi Access
Point
Icon
Operation
>Display
On/Off >NW
Client Mode
Status
Network
connection
state/icon
Icon
changes
due to
signal
strength
Access
point
connection
error
–
–
Connecting
to Wi-Fi
CCM
connection
For details
error
about errors,
see page 15.
24. Video signal indicator
Displays the output video signal in realtime as
a waveform, vectorscope, or histogram.
State
(flashing)
Wi-Fi
standby
(connected)
Off
–
21. File transfer status indicator
Operation >HDR
Setting
3840×2160
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out setting
indicator
Displays and transfer rate (%) during file
transfer. When transfer finishes, disappears
to indicate 100% transfer.
22. Proxy indicator
Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on
(Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting
in the setup menu is set to On). During setup,
“Proxy” blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during
proxy recording.
Video signal
indicator
Operation >Input/
Output >Output
Format >SDI Out
1920×1080
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG)
HDR(S-Log3)
HDR
(S-Log3)
HD Rec/Out setting indicator
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG)
SDR
SDR
19
1. Overview: Screen Display
25. Recording media state/remaining
26. Audio level meter indicators
capacity indicator for each media slot
Displays the state and remaining capacity of
the media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the
PROXY SD card slot.
SxS slot icon indicator
When the MONITOR (audio monitor selection)
switches (page 6) are set to CH-1/2,
the audio levels of channels 1 and 2 are
monitored. When set to CH-3/4, the audio
levels of channels of 3 and 4 are monitored.
*SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are
labeled SxSB.
27. Clip name display
Icon
Media state
–
Media not inserted or not
mounted
Media mounted
Media mounting
(flashing)
Recording (active)
(orange
bar)
Playback (active)
(green
indicator)
Recording/playback (active)
(orange bar
+ green
indicator)
SD card (for proxy data recording) icon
indicator
Displays the name of the clip currently
recording when recording, or displays the
name of the next clip to be recorded during
recording standby.
28.Focus assist indicator
29. Time data display
Icon
Displays the remaining recording/playback
time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by
the DISPLAY switch (page 8).
30.SD card indicator for saving configuration
data
Displays the state of the SD card (for saving
configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD
card slot.
Icon
Media state
–
SD card not inserted or not
mounted
–
Media not inserted or not
mounted
SD card mounted
Media mounted
Mounted SD card is protected
Media mounting
SD card mounting
(orange
bar)
The remaining recording time is displayed
numerically.
Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) function is set to be
performed automatically.
ALAC will be performed automatically when
an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the
ALAC function is enabled, and Maintenance
>Camera Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the
setup menu.
33. AE (auto iris) mode indicator
Media state
Recording (active)
32. ALAC indicator
Displays a detection frame (focus area marker)
indicating the area for detection of degree of
focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator)
indicating the degree of focus within that area.
Icon
(flashing)
It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera
Config >HD SDI Remote I/F is set to
“Characters” in the setup menu.
(flashing)
31. SDI output REC trigger indicator
Displays the superimposition state of the
recording command sent to the SDI connector
output.
Displays the current operating mode of the
auto iris function using an icon and auto iris
override level.
Meaning
Backlight mode
Standard mode
Spotlight mode
34.Auto focus mode indicator (when an auto
focus lens is attached only)
Displays the focus adjustment mode of the
camcorder.
ˎˎAF (auto focus)
ˎˎMF (manual focus)
ˎˎMF* (manual focus with MF assist function
on)
ˎˎFull MF (full manual focus)
35. ND filter indicator
Displays the position number of the currently
selected ND filter (page 4).
When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an
assignable switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of
the electrical CC filter is displayed on the right
of the ND filter indicator (1 to 4).
36. Gain indicator
Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the
GAIN switch, of the video amplifier.
When Operation >Base Setting >High
Sensitivity Mode in the setup menu is set to
On, a icon is displayed.
37. Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator
Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed.
“Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 38)
38.White balance mode indicator
Displays the currently selected white balance
automatic adjustment memory.
ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode
W:A: Memory A mode
W:B: Memory B mode
W:C: Memory C mode
W:P: Preset mode
3200K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on
4300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on
5600K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on
6300K: Appears when an assignable switch
assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on
20
2. Preparation
Preparing a Power Supply
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and
AC adaptors listed below.
ˎˎBP-GL95B Lithium-ion Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with a
charger suitable for each battery.
[CAUTION]
For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the
battery charger operation manual.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law
in the relative area or country.
Note on using the battery pack
Using a Battery Pack
Using AC Power
Press the battery pack against the back of the
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the
battery pack with the line on the camcorder.
Then slide the battery pack down until its
“LOCK” arrow aligns with the line on the
camcorder.
To detach the battery pack, pull the battery
pack up by holding the release button in.
Mount an AC-DN10A on the camcorder in the
same way as a battery pack, then connect to
the AC power supply.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the
terminals may become damaged.
ˎˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS
lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the
ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange),
be careful never to remove the battery pack.
Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card.
ˎˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before
replacing the battery pack.
When a BP-GL95B Battery Pack is used, the
camcorder will operate continuously for
approximately 110 minutes.
[WARNING]
Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
[Note]
The battery pack operating time depends on the
frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient
temperature when used.
A warm battery pack may not be able to be
fully recharged.
21
2. Preparation
Attaching a Viewfinder
[CAUTION]
When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the
camcorder with the eyepiece lens facing the sun.
Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in
the viewfinder and cause fire.
A viewfinder is available separately.
This section describes attachment of the
HDVF‑EL20 as an example.
For the procedure for attaching other viewfinders, refer to
the manual supplied with each viewfinder.
Slide stopper
Adjusting the Diopter
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the
viewfinder image is sharpest.
[2]
Diopter adjustment
ring
[1]
[Note]
When attaching a viewfinder, take note of the following
points.
ˎˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before
coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s
VF connector (20-pin). If you make this connection
when the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may
not function properly.
ˎˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the
camcorder’s VF connector (20-pin). If the coupling is
loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally light
may not operate properly.
Left-to-right positioning ring
2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF
connector (20-pin).
positioning levers and the front-to-back
viewfinder positioning knobs, and then
pull the viewfinder slide assembly
forward.
You can also attach a commercially available
protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52
mm in diameter.
Adjusting the Screen
1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder
to the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3]
tighten the viewfinder left-to-right
positioning ring.
By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder
out of the way so that your right leg does not
hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the
camcorder.
1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder
[3]
Attaching a Viewfinder
Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
VF connector (20-pin)
You can detach the viewfinder by following
the attaching procedure in reverse order.
But, when detaching the viewfinder from the
attachment shoe, pull up the stopper.
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of
the viewfinder screen with the controls shown
below.
Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob.
Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob.
Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob.
2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal
wrench, detach the viewfinder slide
assembly.
22
2. Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder
4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that
Hex socket bolts
Viewfinder slide assembly
3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied
bolts.
Bolts supplied with the BKW-401
the arm of the BKW-401 does not touch
the handle when it is raised.
Adjust position so that arm does
not touch handle
23
2. Preparation
Using the Camcorder for the First Time
When using the camcorder for the first time,
configure the following settings in the menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 88).
3 Turn the MENU knob to set the year,
month, or day, and then press the knob.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the remaining
digits.
Setting the Time Zone
Set the time zone for the region of use. The
default value is “UTC Greenwich.”
1 Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone
in the setup menu.
5 Press the SET button.
The internal clock is set to the date set in
steps 2 to 4.
Next, set the time.
6 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in
the setup menu.
The Time screen appears.
2 Select the time zone to use.
Setting the Date and Time of the
Internal Clock
Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of
the internal clock.
1 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in
the setup menu.
The Date screen appears.
7 Set the time in the same way as when
setting the date.
8 Press the SET button.
The time is registered in the internal
clock.
To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year,
month, or day, and then press the knob.
The selected year, month, or day
becomes editable.
24
2. Preparation
Mounting and Adjusting the Lens
[Note]
When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this
connector, power off the camcorder first.
securing rubber be put on the lens locking
lever as illustrated below.
Adjusting the Flange Focal Length
Lens mount securing rubber
If the lens does not stay in focus properly
as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle,
adjust the flange focal length (the distance
from the plane of the lens mounting flange to
the imaging plane, also called flange-back).
Make this adjustment just one time after
mounting or changing the lens.
When carrying out the adjustment, use a
flange focal length adjustment chart as the
subject.
Attaching a Lens
The lens is available separately.
This section describes an example lens
attachment.
3
For information about attaching a lens, refer to the
operation manual for the lens.
1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove
center slot in the lens mount, and insert
the lens into the mount.
4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS
Approx. 3 m (10 ft.)
connector.
5 Secure the lens cable with the cable
clamp.
If an aberration correction lens is
attached
2
1
1
3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens
locking lever down to lock the lens.
[CAUTION]
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may
come off while the camcorder is being
used. This could cause a serious accident.
Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is
recommended that the lens mount
to telephoto.
6 Point the camcorder at the chart by
turning the focus ring and focus on it.
7 Set the zoom ring to wide angle.
8 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in
focus, being careful not to disturb the
focus ring.
9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in
focus all the way from wide angle to
telephoto.
the lens mount cap from the lens mount.
2 Align the center pin on the lens with the
5 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens
The aberration correction function is activated
automatically. 1) Starting the camcorder with
an aberration correction lens may require
more time than normal because of data
loading at start-up.
Contact a Sony service representative for
information about aberration correction
lenses.
1) The aberration correction function does not operate
if Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup
menu is set to Off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move
the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will
cause an adjustment error.
ˎˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment
chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at
the telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object
(no object closer to the camera than the chart) enters
the screen at the wide-angle end.
1 Set the iris to manual.
2 Place the supplied flange focal length
adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front
of the camera.
3 Open the iris.
The depth-of-field is reduced when the
iris is open, making adjustment easier.
4 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B
ring (flange focal length adjustment ring).
10 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.
25
2. Preparation
Preparing the Audio Input System
Connecting a Microphone to the
MIC IN Connector
[2]
[3]
You can attach a stereo microphone (available
separately) to the microphone holder of the
viewfinder (available separately).
This section describes an example microphone
attachment.
You can connect up to two monaural
microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
connectors, using an optional CAC-12
Microphone Holder.
Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret
condenser microphone
For the procedure for attaching a microphone holder to
other viewfinders, refer to the manual supplied with each
viewfinder.
[1]
1 Loosen the screw and open the
microphone holder clamp.
Microphone holder clamp
[2]
[1]
3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN
connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch
for the channel on which you want to
record the audio from this microphone to
FRONT.
For details about attaching the microphone holder and
microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each
product.
Attaching a Wireless Receiver
To use a Sony wireless microphone system,
power the camcorder off and then attach a
wireless receiver.
ˎˎDWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless
Receiver
ˎˎURX-S03D UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
XLR connection automatic detect
function
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic
detection function switched off (the factory
default setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4 switch to REAR for the channels to
which the audio equipment is connected.
ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic
detection function switched on: When a
cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1
or CH-2 connector, the input from that
connector is automatically selected for
audio recording, regardless of the setting of
the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switch.
ˎˎWhen the AUDIO IN selector switch is set to
LINE or MIC, the type of audio recorded on
audio channels 3 and 4 does not depend on
the XLR automatic detection function. It is
determined by the switch selection only.
The XLR connection automatic detection
function can be switched on/off using
Maintenance >Audio >Rear XLR Auto in the
setup menu.
[4]
For details about attaching a wireless receiver, refer to the
instruction manual of each product.
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
[1] Place the microphone in the holder so
that “UP” is at the top.
[2] Close the microphone holder.
[3] Tighten the screw.
Connecting Microphones to the
AUDIO IN Connectors
4 Secure the microphone cable with the
cable clamp.
Connecting Line Input Audio
Equipment
1 Connect the audio output connector of
the audio equipment that supplies the
line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or
CH-2 connector.
2 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel
to which the audio signal source is
connected to LINE.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switches
[2] To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector
[3] Monaural microphone
[4] AUDIO IN selector switches
26
2. Preparation
Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices
[Note]
Mounting on a Tripod
1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod
Adaptor to the tripod.
2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged
position even after the camcorder is removed. If this
happens, press the red button and move the lever
as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed
position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you
will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod
adaptor.
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap
fitting.
Pull up the strap to lock the fitting.
adaptor.
Connecting a Video Light
Slide the camcorder forward along the
groove in the adaptor until it clicks.
3 Make sure that the camcorder is securely
attached by moving it back and forth.
To remove the camcorder from the tripod
attachment, hold down the red button and
pull the lever in the direction of the arrow.
With this camcorder, you can use the Anton
Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light
(powered by 12 V with maximum power
consumption of 50 W).
ˎˎIf you connect the video light to the LIGHT
connector on the camcorder and set the
LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can turn the light
on and off automatically as you start and
stop recording on this camcorder.
ˎˎThe output of the LIGHT connector on
the camcorder is regulated to 12 V even
when the camcorder is supplied with over
12 V power (through the DC IN connector
or battery pack). The brightness or color
temperature of the light will not change in
response to voltage increase.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption
of 50 W or greater.
ˎˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will
change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN
connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V.
To attach a video light, fit the video light to
the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip,
and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT
connector.
Red button
[Note]
Lever
The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch
tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slidetype shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit.
Adjusting the Shoulder Pad
Position
You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth
within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps
you get the best balance for shooting with the
camcorder on your shoulder.
1,3
Clip
2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap
fitting on the other side of the grip in the
same way.
To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the
following diagram.
Press here and pull in the direction shown by
the arrow to release.
2
Shoulder pad
1 Raise the lever in the center of the
shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad.
2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or
forward until it is in the most convenient
position.
3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder
pad in the selected position.
27
2. Preparation
Handling SxS Memory Cards
This camcorder records video and audio on
SxS memory cards (not supplied) loaded into
one or both of its memory card slots.
In addition to SxS memory cards, the
camcorder can also record to SDXC/SDHC
cards (not supplied) using the MEAD-SD02
Media Adaptor (optional).
The file system supported by each type of
media is given below.
[Note]
Memory card
2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card
File system
exFAT
UDF
FAT
SxS memory cards
Yes
Yes
No
SDXC cards
Yes
No
No
SDHC cards
No
No
Yes
Use SxS PRO X or SxS PRO+ memory cards when
recording in XAVC-I 3840×2160P.
SxS memory cards
The memory cards listed above comply with
the ExpressCard memory card standard.
ˎˎSxS, SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+, SxS PRO, and SxS1 are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
ˎˎThe ExpressCard label and logo are the
property of the Personal Computer Memory
Card International Association (PCMCIA)
and are licensed to Sony Corporation. All
other trademarks and trade names are the
property of their respective owners.
[Note]
Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct
orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one
side facing the direction shown in the diagram, and
then insert the card.
1 Open the cover, and then press the EJECT
Slot A access indicator
Slot B access indicator
slot.
Slot B
Ejecting SxS Memory Cards
button to release the lock and extract the
button.
1 Slide the cover to the left to open.
About SxS Memory Cards
SxS PRO X series
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS
indicator that indicate the slot status.
Inserting SxS Memory Cards
Slot A
Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO X, SxS
PRO+, SxS PRO, or SxS-1) with this camcorder.
ACCESS indicator status
Indicator
Slot status
Lights in
orange
Accessing the SxS memory card
(lights during data reading and
writing)
Lights in
green
Standby (the loaded SxS memory
card is ready for recording or
playback)
Not lit
No SxS memory card is loaded.
An unusable card is loaded.
An SxS memory card is loaded, but
the other slot is selected.
Press the button
once to release the
lock.
2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the
card.
[Note]
When you press the EJECT button, take care not to
impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of
the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail
to release.
The ACCESS indicator lights in orange,
and then lights in green to indicate that
the memory card is usable.
3 Close the cover.
[Note]
Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the
camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card
is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be
discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is
lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or
remove a memory card.
28
2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
Selecting the SxS Memory Card to
Use
When SxS memory cards are loaded in both
slot A and slot B, you can press the SLOT
SELECT button to select the SxS memory card
to use.
When the remaining recording time on the
recording SxS memory card falls below 60
seconds, the remaining capacity indicator
for the corresponding media slot flashes on
the viewfinder screen to indicate that the
camcorder will switch SxS memory cards soon.
Subsequently, the camcorder switches
automatically to the other card when the
selected card becomes full, and recording
continues.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback.
The memory cards are not switched even if you press
the button. Button operations are enabled when a
thumbnail screen (page 79) is displayed.
ˎˎ In 1-slot Simul Rec mode, recording may not be able
to continue after switching cards if the next card
already has 200 or more clips.
[Note]
SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM
device that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on
this camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the
setup menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot
B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether
to format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is
displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit
orange.
When formatting ends, a completion
message appears. Press the MENU knob
to dismiss the message.
If formatting fails
Formatting (Initializing) SxS
Memory Cards
When an unformatted SxS memory card or
an SxS memory card formatted in another
specification is inserted, a message notifying
you that the media has a different file system
appears. In this case, format the memory card
in the following way.
SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT or
FAT by factory default.
A format operation may fail because the SxS
memory card is write protected, or because it
is not the type of card specified for use with
this camcorder.
In this case, an error message appears. Follow
the instructions in the error message and
exchange the card for an SxS memory card
that can be used with this camcorder.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including
recorded video data and setup files.
ˎˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format
SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The
formats of cards formatted on other devices are not
recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to
format them again on this camcorder.
Formatting while recording
Even while recording, the SxS memory card
loaded in the other card slot can be formatted.
ˎˎIf you continue recording, the message
“Media Full” appears and recording stops
when the total remaining recording time
falls to 0.
[Notes]
[Note]
ˎˎ Formatting is not supported during 1-slot Simul Rec,
during playback, or when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
ˎˎ During formatting, recording to an SxS memory card
loaded in the other card slot cannot be started.
About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS
memory card.
The display of remaining recording time changes to “0”
and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip
limit is reached.
Checking the Remaining
Recording Time
Restoring SxS Memory Cards
You can check the remaining capacity of the
SxS memory cards loaded in the two slots
by checking the recording media remaining
capacity indicator in the viewfinder.
The remaining recording time is calculated
from the remaining capacity of the media
in each slot and the current video format
(recording bit rate), and is displayed in units of
minutes.
You can check the remaining capacity on a bar
graph by displaying the Media Status screen
(page 14).
[Note]
A
mark appears when a memory card is write
protected.
When to exchange SxS memory cards
ˎˎThe warning message “Media Near Full”
appears, the WARNING indicator and the
REC indication on the viewfinder screen
flash, and the buzzer sounds when the
total remaining recording time of the two
memory cards falls to five minutes during
recording.
Exchange one of the cards for media with
available recording capacity.
If for any reason an error should occur in
a memory card, the card must be restored
before use.
When you load an SxS memory card that
needs to be restored, a message appears in
the viewfinder to ask whether you want to
restore it.
To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to
select [Execute], and then press the knob.
The restoration starts.
During restoration, a message is displayed,
and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When restoration ends, a completion message
appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
If restoration fails
ˎˎWrite protected SxS memory cards and
cards on which memory errors have
occurred cannot be restored. A warning
message appears for such cards. Follow the
instructions in the message and unprotect
the card or replace it with another card.
ˎˎSxS memory cards on which memory errors
have occurred may become usable if they
are reformatted.
29
2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards
ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored
while others cannot. The restored clips can
be played normally.
ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some
Clips” keeps appearing after repeated
attempts at restoration, it may be possible
to restore the SxS memory card with the
following procedure.
[1] Use the application software
(page 168) to copy the required clips
to another SxS memory card.
[2] Format the unusable SxS memory card
on the camcorder.
[3] Copy the required clips back to the
newly formatted SxS memory card.
[Note]
For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,
be sure to use this camcorder.
Media recorded with a device other than this camcorder
or with another camcorder of different version (even
of the same model) may not be restored using this
camcorder.
30
2. Preparation
Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data
The following SD cards can be used for saving
configuration data.
Checking the Remaining Capacity
SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
You can check the remaining capacity on
an SD card on the Media Status screen
(page 14).
To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder
in the slot of another device, make a backup of
the card, then reformat the card in the device
to be used.
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they
are used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD
card is inserted into the camcorder, format the
SD card.
1 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Utility) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen prompting whether
to format the card appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is
displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit
orange.
When formatting ends, a completion
message appears. Press the MENU knob
to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The
card cannot be restored.
31
2. Preparation
Using a Media Adaptor
[Notes]
ˎˎ For professional applications, the use of other
media will not provide the same high reliability and
durability that is obtained using SxS memory cards.
ˎˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with
this camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact
your Sony dealer.
SD Cards
By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media
Adaptor, you can insert an SD card into an SxS
memory card slot and use it for recording and
playback.
[Note]
If an SD card and other media are inserted in their
respective memory card slots, only the first inserted
media is recognized and the last inserted media is not
recognized.
The following SD cards are supported.
SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 1)
SDHC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 2)
1) Supported if the file system is exFAT.
2) Supported if the file system is FAT.
For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor,
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor.
[Notes]
ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved
with an SD card.
ˎˎ Seamless playback across clip boundaries is not
supported.
ˎˎ Recording and playback using SD cards is not
supported when shooting in XAVC-I or XAVC-L
3840×2160P format.
ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion
recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card.
Formatting (initializing)
SD cards must be formatted the first time they
are used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD
card is inserted into the camcorder, format the
SD card.
If an unformatted SD card or an SD card that
was formatted in a different specification is
inserted, a message asking for confirmation to
format media or a message notifying you that
the media has a different file system appears.
Format the card using the following procedure.
1 Select Operation >Format Media in the
setup menu.
2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot
B).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether
to format the card appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message is
displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit
orange.
When formatting ends, a completion
message appears. Press the MENU knob
to dismiss the message.
[Note]
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card,
including protected video. The data cannot be restored.
Connection between the camcorder and
a computer
Insert the recorded SD card into a slot in the
camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable.
To use a memory card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat
the card in the device to be used.
32
3. Settings and Adjustments
Format Settings
You can set the file system, system frequency,
and video format using Operation >Format in
the setup menu.
For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu
Operations” (page 88).
Selecting the File System
You can select the file system.
1 Select Operation >Format >File System in
1 Select Operation >Format >Frequency in
Video Formats
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the system
The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution
and system frequency.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select
System frequency
(Operation >Format
>Frequency in setup
menu)
the setup menu.
frequency, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically
after executing [Execute].
59.94/50
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file
system, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
The camcorder will reboot automatically
after executing [Execute].
[Note]
The file system cannot be changed during recording/
playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Switching the Video Format
Refer to “Video Formats” (page 32) as
required when switching the video format.
1 Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the video
format, and press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select
Switching the System Frequency
You can switch the system frequency as
required.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during
recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
ˎˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or
between 25 and 50, the camcorder does not reboot
automatically.
ˎˎ Switching the system frequency will automatically
switch the video format to the format used previously
at that frequency.
[Cancel] to cancel, and then press the
MENU knob.
29.97/25/23.98
File system
(Operation >Format
>File System in setup
menu)
Picture size
Video format
(Operation >Format
>Rec Format in setup menu)
exFAT
UDF
FAT
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L200 2160P
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080P
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080i
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 25 1080i
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 1080i
1920×1080
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 720P
1280×720
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1920×1080i
1920×1080
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1440×1080i
1440×1080
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1280×720P
1280×720
–
–
Yes
SP 1440×1080i
1440×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
3840×2160
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
1920×1080
Yes
–
–
XAVC-L 35 1080P
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 1080P
1920×1080
Yes
Yes
–
HD422 50 720P
1280×720
Yes
Yes
Yes
HQ 1920×1080P
1920×1080
3840×2160
1920×1080
33
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
SDI OUT Connector and HDMI Output Connector Output Formats
The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu.
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The following restrictions apply when using XAVC proxy recording (“proxy recording” in the following table), when using the network function, or when XAVC Proxy Rec Start is assigned to an assignable switch.
ˋˋ3840×2160P SDI output format setting cannot be selected when recording at 3840×2160P.
ˎˎ If proxy recording or network functions are enabled during operation with 3840×2160P SDI output format setting, the SDI output setting changes to 1920×1080P (Level B) (59.94/50) or 1920×1080PsF (29.97/23.98/25).
Operation >Format (codec
omitted) in the setup menu
SDI output format selectable
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu
When both proxy recording and When proxy recording or
network functions are off
network function is on
SDI Out1 Output
SDI Out2 Output
HDMI Output
59.94
Yes
No
3840×2160P 12G
3840×2160P 12G
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 12G
1920×1080P (Level A)
3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
29.97
23.98
1920×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
1280×720P
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 3G Link1
3840×2160P 3G Link2
3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
1280×720P
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
1280×720P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 3G Link1
3840×2160P 3G Link2
3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
1920×1080i(2-3PD)
Yes
Yes
1280×720P(2-3PD)
1280×720P(2-3PD)
1280×720P(2-3PD)
34
3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings
Operation >Format (codec
omitted) in the setup menu
50
3840×2160P
1920×1080P
25
SDI output format selectable
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu
When both proxy recording and When proxy recording or
network functions are off
network function is on
SDI Out1 Output
SDI Out2 Output
HDMI Output
Yes
No
3840×2160P 12G
3840×2160P 12G
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 12G
1920×1080P (Level A)
3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P (Level A)
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080P (Level B)
1920×1080P (Level B)
–
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1440×1080i
Yes
Yes
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1920×1080i
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
1280×720P
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P 6G
3840×2160P
Yes
No
3840×2160P 3G Link1
3840×2160P 3G Link2
3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080i
1280×720P
Yes
Yes
1280×720P
1280×720P
1280×720P
35
3. Settings and Adjustments
Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range
You can set the imaging dynamic range to
High Dynamic Range (HDR) mode to record
and output images with BT.2020 equivalent
color space and increased dynamic range
when the recording format is 4K QFHD or HD.
When this function is used together with the
1-slot Simul Rec function, a 4K QFHD main clip
can be recorded in high dynamic range and
an HD subclip can be recorded in standard
dynamic range (SDR).
The High Dynamic Range function is available
if the file system is exFAT.
[Note]
Change the dynamic range mode setting with the
Picture Cache Rec function set to Off.
Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec >Off
Setting the Dynamic Range
1 Select Operation >Base Setting >Shooting
Mode in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the
dynamic range mode.
Select HDR to set to High Dynamic Range
or SDR to set to standard dynamic range.
HDR settings
When HDR is selected for the dynamic range
mode, configure HDR settings using Operation
>HDR Setting in the setup menu. For details,
see page 93.
HDR(HLG)
HDR(HLG) can be set for both 4K (QFHD) and
HD.
When the high dynamic range mode is
set to HDR(HLG), the color space is set to
ITU-R BT.2020. You can also specify the
HLG type using HLG Look. For details, see
“HLG Look” (page 102).
HDR(S-Log3)
HDR(S-Log3) can be set for both 4K (QFHD)
and HD.
When the high dynamic range mode is set
to HDR(S-Log3), the color space can be set to
ITU-R BT.2020 or S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine.
For details, see “HDR Setting” (page 93).
SDR Gain
When the HD Rec/Out setting is SDR, this sets
the HD-SDR gain relative to the 4K(QHFD)-HDR
value. This setting is applied to the HD-SDR
recording/output, viewfinder display, and LCD
monitor.
Gamma display assist function
When the HDR function is used, the contrast
of the video shown in the viewfinder and on
the LCD monitor is lower than when using
conventional dynamic range, making the
picture harder to see. In this case, you can
adjust the contrast of the image displayed
in the viewfinder and LCD monitor to an
appropriate level using the gamma display
assist function.
The gamma display assist function is
automatically applied when HDR Setting >HD
Rec/Out is set to HDR(HLG) or HLG(S-Log3).
You can also assign the gamma display assist
function to an assignable switch, and then
turn the function on/off with a single button
touch as required.
[Note]
This function is applied to the image in the viewfinder
and LCD monitor. It is not applied to the recorded image
or output image.
36
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
To ensure excellent image quality when using
this camcorder, conditions may require that
both the black balance and the white balance
be adjusted.
Black balance and white balance adjustment
values that are automatically set by the
camcorder and the various settings are stored
in the camcorder memory and retained even
when the power is turned off.
Adjusting the Black Balance
The black balance will require adjustment in
the following cases.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used for the first
time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has not been used for
a long time
ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used under
conditions in which the surrounding
temperature has changed greatly
ˎˎWhen the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo)
values have been changed with Operation
>Gain Switch in the setup menu.
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black
balance when using the camcorder after it has
been off.
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments
are performed in the following order: black
set and black balance. Manual black balance
adjustment can be selected from the setup
menu.
Automatic black balance adjustment is
disabled in the following cases.
ˎˎDuring recording
ˎˎDuring special recording modes
ˎˎWhen the shutter mode is SLS
1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.
2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK
and release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears
during execution, and changes to “OK”
when the adjustment finishes.
Adjustment values are saved to memory
automatically.
[Notes]
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is
automatically closed.
ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain
selection circuit is automatically activated so you may
see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not
a fault.
Adjusting the White Balance
Always readjust the white balance when the
lighting conditions change.
1 Set the switches and selectors as shown
below.
ˎˎGAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that
is as small as possible)
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch: A or B 1)
1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B
only when Operation >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to Memory.
If automatic black balance adjustment
cannot be made
2 Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting
If the black balance adjustment cannot
be completed normally, an error message
will appear for about three seconds on the
viewfinder screen.
3 Place a white test card under the same
Error message
Meaning
NG: Iris not Closed
The lens iris did not close;
adjustment was
impossible.
NG: Timeout
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
standard number of
attempts.
conditions as follows.
lighting conditions as the subject to be
shot and zoom in on it.
Alternatively, any white object such as a
cloth or a wall can be used.
The absolute minimum white area is as
follows.
Rectangle centered on the screen
The lengths of the sides are 70% of the
length and width of the screen. 10% or more
of the surface area of the image within the
rectangular area must be white.
If any of the above error messages is
displayed, retry the black balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual (option).
[Note]
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.
[Note]
Make sure there are no bright spots in the
rectangle.
4 Adjust the lens iris.
Iris adjusted manually: Set the iris to an
appropriate setting.
Iris adjusted using auto iris: Set the
automatic/manual switch on the lens
to automatic.
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE
and then release the switch.
The message “Executing…” appears
during execution, and changes to “OK:
(color temperature of subject)” when the
adjustment finishes.
The adjustment values are saved
automatically in the memory selected in
step 1 (A or B).
[Note]
The iris may hunt 1) during the adjustment. To
prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as
IG, IS, or S) on the lens.
1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of
the image, resulting from repeated response to
automatic iris control.
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.
If the automatic white balance
adjustment cannot be made
If the white balance adjustment cannot
be completed normally, an error message
will appear for about three seconds on the
viewfinder screen.
Error message
Meaning
NG: Low Light
The white video level is too
low. Either open the lens iris
or increase the gain.
NG: High Light
The white video level is too
high. Either stop down the
lens iris or change the ND
filter.
37
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance
Error message
Meaning
NG: Color Temp.
High
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too high,
and could not be adjusted.
Adjust the color temperature
of the lighting, then update
memory.
NG: Color Temp.
Low
The color temperature of the
subject lighting is too low,
and could not be adjusted.
Adjust the color temperature
of the lighting, then update
memory.
NG: Out of Range Value could not be adjusted
because the difference
between the current value
and reference value exceeds
the adjustment range.
NG: Poor White
Area
The white surface of the
subject is too narrow, and
could not be adjusted.
NG: Timeout
Adjustment could not be
completed within the
specified time.
If any of the above error messages is
displayed, retry the white balance adjustment.
If the error message occurs again, an internal
check is necessary.
For information about this internal check, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
If you have no time to adjust the white
balance
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.
Changing the color temperature when
the ND filter is switched
You can assign electrical CC (color correction)
filters to ND filters (page 4) allowing you
to change the color temperature automatically
when the ND filter is switched.
1 Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter
4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching
2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER
White balance memory
C.Temp to On in the setup menu
(page 111).
knob position number 1, select [ND FLT C.
Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4,
select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>].
3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
color temperature.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required.
Switching electrical CC filters with an
assignable switch
You can assign the function that
switches between electrical CC filters to
an assignable switch. This allows you
to switch between color temperatures
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been
assigned using up to four positions (A to D)
with each press of the assignable switch.
1 Select Maintenance >White Filter in the
setup menu.
2 Select the position to which to assign a CC
filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>]
to [Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the
MENU knob to select the desired color
temperature.
Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D>
selected.
When the assignable switch is pressed,
the setting for that position is not
displayed. For example, if “-----” is set for
one position, then switching between the
remaining three positions is carried out.
3 Repeat step 2 as required.
function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable
switch (page 122).
Values stored in memory are held until the
white balance is next adjusted, even if the
camcorder power is turned off.
The camcorder has two white balance
memories, A and B. You can automatically
save adjustment values for each ND filter in
the memory that corresponds to the WHITE
BAL switch setting (A or B). The camcorder
has four built-in ND filters, allowing you to
save a total of eight adjustment values (4×2).
However, the contents of the memories are
not linked to ND filter settings in the following
case.
ˎˎWhen the number of memories allocated to
each of A and B is limited to one by setting
Operation >White Setting >Filter White
Memory in the setup menu to Off.
Also, when Operation >White Setting >White
Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to [ATW
(Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE
BAL switch is set to B, the ATW function is
activated to automatically adjust the white
balance of the picture being shot for varying
lighting conditions.
38
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting the Electronic Shutter
Shutter Modes
ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode
When a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected, only standard mode (Speed) can be selected.
Select this mode for obtaining images with
no horizontal bands of noise when shooting
subjects such as monitor screens.
As shown in the following tables, the range
of shutter speeds that can be set varies
depending on whether the Slow & Quick
Motion (S&Q) function is on or off.
Standard mode
System
Shutter speed (unit: Hz)
frequency S&Q: Off
S&Q: On
The shutter modes that can be used with the
electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that
can be selected are listed below.
[Note]
Select this mode for shooting fast-moving
subjects with little blurring.
You can set the shutter speed in one of two
shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the
speed is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in
which the speed is set in degrees.
59.94i
60.00 to 7000
–
59.94P
60.00 to 8000
60.00 to 8000
29.97P
30.00 to 8000
30.00 to 8000
23.98P
23.99 to 6000
30.03 to 6000
50i
50.00 to 7000
–
50P
50.00 to 7000
50.00 to 7000
Speed mode
25P
25.02 to 7000
30.00 to 7000
System
Shutter speed (unit: seconds)
frequency
59.94i
59.94P
50i
50P
1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250,
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
29.97P
1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,
1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
25P
1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120,
1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000
23.98P
1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96,
1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000
a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder
is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec
Function >Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a
value that is greater than the system frequency.
Angle mode
180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25°
SLS (slow speed shutter) mode
This mode is used to shoot subjects with low
illumination. The number of accumulated
frames shot when using the slow speed
shutter function can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
16 using Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of
Frames in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in
Slow & Quick Motion mode.
ˎˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or
change the number of accumulated frames when
recording.
Setting the Shutter Mode and
Shutter Speed
[Notes]
ˎˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider
as the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the
depth of field.
ˎˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the
current system frequency.
Switching between Speed mode and
Angle mode
1 Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or
[Angle], and then press the knob.
Setting the shutter mode and shutter
speed (standard mode)
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is
retained even when the camcorder power is
turned off.
1 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to
SELECT.
The current shutter setting indication
appears in the viewfinder for about three
seconds.
2 Before the shutter setting in step 1
disappears, push the SHUTTER switch
down to SELECT again. Repeat this step
until the desired mode or speed appears.
When all modes and speeds are
displayed, the display changes in the
following order.
Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i)
ECS Mode
[Note]
Depending on the frame rate setting (page 48), some
shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick
Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest
selectable shutter speed.
Example when shooting in XAVC-I
1080P/29.97P, frame rate of 60, and Slow &
Quick Motion:
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: Off
1/401/501/601/100…
ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: On
1/601/100…
Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode)
1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the
previous item).
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired
frequency or number of frames.
Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode)
1 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in
the setup menu and set the shutter mode
to On.
2 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number
of Frames in the setup menu and select
the desired number of frames.
39
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Auto Iris
The reference value for automatic iris
adjustment can be changed to aid the
shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects,
or to prevent blown-out highlights.
Convergence
level
Description
–99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or
more darker
±0
Reference level
+99
Sets the iris 2 f-stops or
more lighter
Setting the Auto Iris Operating
Mode
Set the operating mode used when adjusting
levels using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the
operating mode, then press the knob.
Operating
mode
Description
Backlight
Mode for shooting in
backlight conditions
Standard
Standard mode
Spotlight
Mode for reducing blown
out highlights when there
are spotlights centered on a
subject.
Set the Target Convergence Level
for Auto Iris
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the level in
the range –99 to +99, then press the
knob.
Setting the Auto Iris Speed
Set the operating speed when adjusting levels
using auto iris.
1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the speed
in the range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest),
then press the knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to change the
reference value.
[Note]
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode
is not ECS.
The current reference value is shown by
the iris position indicator (page 16) on
the viewfinder screen.
ˎˎTo open the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob counterclockwise as seen from the
front of the camcorder.
Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1.
ˎˎTo close the iris slightly, turn the MENU
knob clockwise as seen from the front
of the camcorder.
Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1.
The changed reference value is retained
until the power of the camcorder is turned
off. Even if the reference value is
changed, it reverts to the standard value
every time the power is turned on.
The shaded parts indicate the
area of light detection.
If you select Var, the following items
become effective and you can set the
window of the desired size. Set Operation
>Auto Iris >Iris Var Width, Iris Var Height,
Iris Var H Position, and Iris Var V Position
in the setup menu.
Item
setting
Iris Var Width
The width of the window
Iris Var Height
The height of the window
Iris Var H
Position
The position of the
window in the horizontal
direction
Iris Var V
Position
The position of the
window in the vertical
direction.
When you exit the menu, the auto iris window
selected in step 3 appears.
Unless you need to keep this window
displayed, set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect
Window Indication in the setup menu to Off.
Changing the Reference Value of
the Lens Iris
Setting the Auto Iris Detection
Window
The reference value for the lens iris can be set
within the following range with respect to the
standard value.
ˎˎ+0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25
to 1 stop further open
ˎˎ–0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25
to 1 stop further closed
Also you can set the area where light
detection occurs.
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window
Reducing the Effect of Bright
Highlights
2 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close
too much, leaving the overall image dark, a
condition known as clipped blacks. In such
cases, switching the clip highlight function
on will clip the signal above a certain level,
reducing the effects of the auto iris.
Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the
setup menu to On.
1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in
the setup menu to On.
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.
Indication in the setup menu to On.
The current automatic iris window
appears on the viewfinder screen.
If it is not necessary to display the auto
iris window on the screen, set to Off.
Window in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired
auto iris window appears, and then press
the knob.
40
3. Settings and Adjustments
Adjusting the Audio Level
When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to
AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals
recorded on each channel are adjusted
automatically. You can also make manual
adjustments.
[Note]
Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the
input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted
automatically.
Target Audio Level for Manual
Adjustment
Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target
level.
If the audio level meter shows a maximum
level of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input
audio level is excessive.
Excessive input level
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Levels of the Audio Inputs from
the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2
Connectors
Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level
MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level
Setting
Knob
Setting
Knob
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN
[Note]
CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN
CH1 or CH2 switch to REAR.
To adjust both input signals, set both
switches to REAR.
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es)
corresponding to the channel(s) selected
in step 1 to MANUAL.
3 With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s)
selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio
level meter shows up to –20 dB for a
normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting
the recording level
Target input level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you
can select which audio level control controls
the audio recording level of the input to each
of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The
correspondences between the settings of the
menu items and the controls are as follows.
[Note]
If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording
level cannot be adjusted using the camcorder.
Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side1
LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs
and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL
knob is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2
cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL
knob before adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs.
Manually Adjusting the Audio
Level of the MIC IN Connector
1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN
switch(es) to FRONT.
2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the
desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to
MANUAL.
3 Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so
that the audio level meter shows up to
–20 dB for a normal input volume.
Selecting the knob used for adjusting
the recording level
In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu,
you can select which audio level control
controls the audio recording level of the front
microphone input. The correspondences
between the settings of the menu items and
the controls are as follows.
MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level
Setting
Knob
Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side2
LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked operation)
[Note]
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and
LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL
(CH1/CH2) knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position
of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC
LEVEL knob.
Recording Audio on Channels 3
and 4
1 Select the audio recorded on audio
channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/
CH4 switches.
CH3 switch
Channel 3 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO
IN CH1 connector
WIRELESS
Wireless microphone audio
CH4 switch
Channel 4 recording target
FRONT
Front microphone audio
REAR
Audio signal input to AUDIO
IN CH2 connector
41
3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level
CH4 switch
WIRELESS
Channel 4 recording target
Wireless microphone audio
2 To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO
SELECT CH 3-4 switch to AUTO.
To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT
CH 3-4 switch to MANUAL.
3 Select the knobs that adjust the audio
levels with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio
CH4 Level items under Maintenance >Audio
in the setup menu.
Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording
level
Setting
Knob
Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side3
LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked
operation)
Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording
level
Setting
Knob
Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob
Front
MIC LEVEL knob
Front+Side4
LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked
operation)
You can now adjust the levels of audio
channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected
here.
42
3. Settings and Adjustments
Setting Time Data
Setting the Timecode
The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00
to 23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the display in the LCD monitor to
status display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
PRESET.
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode
flashes.
5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing digit.
Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press
the RESET/RETURN button.
6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN.
F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator
keeps running)
R-RUN: Recording run (timecode
generator runs only while recording)
[Note]
When Picture Cache Rec mode is active, time data
cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch
to SET. To set time data, turn Picture Cache Rec mode
off.
Switching between DF and NDF
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode
or non-drop frame (NDF) mode using
Maintenance >Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup
menu.
To make the timecode consecutive
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set
to R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on
the media normally produces consecutive
timecode. However, once you remove the
media and record on another media, the
timecode will no longer be consecutive when
you use the original media again for recording.
In this case, to make the timecode
consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK
switch to REGEN.
4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to
change values, and use the left and right
arrow buttons to move the flashing digit.
Repeat until all digits are set.
To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press
the RESET/RETURN button.
5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the
desired operating mode for the timecode
generator.
Saving the real time in the timecode
User bit memory function
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode.
The time of the camcorder internal clock is
applied as the real time.
The user bit setting (apart from the real time)
is automatically retained in memory even
when the power is turned off.
For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting
the Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 23).
Setting the User Bits
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal
digits), you can record user information such
as the date, time, or scene number on the
timecode track.
1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to
switch the display in the LCD monitor to
status display.
2 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.
3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.
External timecode
Reference video signal
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
[2] TC IN connector
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of
camcorders with one camcorder as
reference
Synchronizing the Timecode to an
External Source
You can synchronize the internal timecode
generator of this camcorder with an external
generator. You can also synchronize the
timecode generators of other camcorders/
VTRs with the internal generator of this
camcorder.
1 Connect both the reference video signal
and the external timecode as illustrated
below.
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external
signal
To next camcorder
[1] GENLOCK IN connector
[2] TC IN connector
[3] SYNC OUT connector
[4] TC OUT connector
43
3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data
2 Turn on the POWER switch.
User bit settings during synchronization
3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to
When the timecode is synchronized to
an external signal, only the time data is
synchronized with the external timecode
value.
PRESET.
4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
F-RUN.
5 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.
6 Supply a timecode signal and a reference
video signal, complying with the SMPTE
standard and in proper phase
relationship, to the TC IN connector and to
the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.
This operation synchronizes the internal
timecode generator with the external
timecode. Once about ten seconds have
elapsed after the timecode locks, the
external lock state is maintained even if
the external timecode source is
disconnected.
To release the external synchronization,
first stop the external timecode input,
then set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to
R-RUN.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal
timecode is immediately synchronized with the
external timecode and the time data display will show
the value of the external timecode. However, wait
for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes
before recording.
ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not
the same as the system frequency of the camcorder,
the camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this
occurs, the timecode will not acquire successful lock
with the external timecode.
Note on changing the power supply
from the battery pack to an external
power supply during external
synchronization
To maintain a continuous power supply,
connect the external power supply to the DC
IN connector before removing the battery
pack. You may lose timecode external
synchronization if you remove the battery
pack first.
Camcorder genlock during external
synchronization
During external synchronization, the
camcorder is genlocked to the reference video
signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector.
44
4. Shooting
Basic Operations
This section explains the basic shooting and
recording procedures.
Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera
system to verify that it is operating properly.
1 Attach a fully charged battery pack
(page 20).
2 Load one or two SxS memory cards
(page 27).
If you load two cards, the camcorder
switches automatically to the second card
when the first card becomes full.
3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch
(page 3) to ON.
4 Make the following settings.
Marker display: On (page 96)
Iris: Auto (page 39)
Zoom: Auto
Camera output: Select the picture
currently being shot (camera picture),
and turn the DCC function on
(page 6)
Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free
Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (page 42)
Audio input channel selection: Auto
(page 9)
5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the
BLACK position to adjust the black
balance (page 36).
6 Select a filter according to the lighting
conditions, and adjust the white balance
(page 36).
7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and
adjust the focus and zoom.
8 If you are using the electronic shutter,
select an appropriate shutter mode and
speed (page 38).
9 Do one of the following to start recording.
‒‒ Press the REC START button
(page 4).
‒‒ Press the VTR button on the lens.
‒‒ Turn on the assignable switch to which
the Rec function has been assigned
(page 120).
During recording, the TALLY indicators,
the tally indicator on the front panel of
the viewfinder, and the REC indicator on
the viewfinder screen light. Adjust the
zoom and focus as required.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Never remove the battery pack while the
camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS
indicator on the right-side panel is lit in blue and
the ACCESS indicator in the card slot section is
lit in orange). Doing so risks the loss of several
seconds of data before the recording was
interrupted, because internal processing will not
end normally.
ˎˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F
FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not
function during recording.
10 To stop recording, perform one of the
operations listed in step 9.
The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator
on the front panel of the viewfinder, and
the REC indicator on the viewfinder screen
go out, and camcorder enters recording
standby (Stby) mode.
A clip is created from the video and audio
data and the metadata recorded between
steps 9 and 10.
To review the recording (rec review)
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, press an assignable switch
assigned with the Rec Review function to
play back the last two seconds of the clip
at normal speed. Press and hold an
assignable switch assigned with the Rec
Review function for one second or longer
to start play back from the frame two
seconds prior to the last frame at four
times speed in the reverse direction.
Then, release the button to play the clip
from that point at normal speed. The clip
is played to the end, then Rec Review
ends and the camcorder returns to Stby
mode.
When the Rec Review function is assigned
to the RET button on the lens, you can
also conduct a review by using the RET
button.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue
recording.
With each repetition, another clip is
created on the memory card.
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Clip names
Eight-character clips names (consisting of a
four-character prefix and a four-digit number)
are generated automatically for clips recorded
by this camcorder.
Example: ABCD0001
You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix
in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix
to a user-specified string of characters (four
to 46 characters in length). (A user-specified
prefix cannot be changed after recording.)
The four-digit number at the end of
clip names is generated automatically,
incrementing as clips are recorded.
To delete a clip
You can delete the last recorded clip using
the Last Clip Delete function (page 121).
To delete all clips or specific clips, perform
the operation from the thumbnail screen
(page 79).
Playing Recorded Clips
[Notes]
ˎˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second
after stopping recording.
ˎˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded
on one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card
has enough free capacity to record more clips, when
600 clips have been recorded, no further recording is
possible.
ˎˎ Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be created.
For example, even if recording is started and then
stopped within 2 seconds, the recording continues for
a duration of 2 seconds. Also, if recording is started,
immediately stopped, and then restarted within 2
seconds of the initial recording start, two clips are
created.
ˎˎ The maximum continuous recording time spanning
several memory cards is 24 hours. When 24 hours
have elapsed, recording stops.
1 Insert the SxS memory card to play
(page 27).
2 Press the PREV button (page 8) or the
F REV button (page 7) to cue up the
clip to play.
3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the
playback picture appears in the
viewfinder.
45
4. Shooting: Basic Operations
Seamless playback
Switching between memory cards
Seamless playback across clip boundaries
is supported if each clip recorded on an SxS
PRO+ or SxS PRO X memory card has the
following status.
ˎˎVideo format is XAVC-I/XAVC-L (HD) and
clip length is 4 seconds or longer, or video
format is XAVC-I/XAVC-L (QFHD) and clip
length is 8 seconds or longer
ˎˎVideo format is MPEG HD and clip length is 2
seconds or longer
When two memory cards are loaded, press the
SLOT SELECT button (page 28) to select the
active slot.
It is not possible to switch between memory
cards during playback.
[Notes]
ˎˎ For SxS-1 cards, double the length described above is
required.
ˎˎ Seamless playback not supported for SD cards.
Pausing playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play
is paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
High-speed playback
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F
REV button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
Stopping playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and
the camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops
and the thumbnail screen (page 79)
appears in the viewfinder.
Playback also stops and the timecode screen
appears in the viewfinder when you start
recording during playback, and when you
eject an SxS memory card.
46
4. Shooting
Advanced Operations
Recording Shot Marks
On this camcorder, two types of shot marks
are available. You can record them at userspecified positions to make it easier for editors
to cue up those positions.
The maximum number of shot marks per clip
is 999.
You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete
shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting
Essence Marks in Clips” (page 83).
To record shot marks, turn on an assignable
switch assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot
Mark 2 function.
When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark
1” or “Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the
viewfinder for about three seconds near the
timecode indicator.
[Note]
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for
recording.
Setting Clip Flags
To make it easier for editors to select good
clips, you can set clip flags in recorded clips.
Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu.
For details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips”
(page 83) and “Deleting a Clip Flag”
(page 83).
[Note]
An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for
recording.
Recording Retroactive Images
(Picture Cache Rec Function)
The camcorder always maintains a cache
of video and audio data for a set interval
(maximum of 15 seconds) in internal storage
memory when shooting, allowing you to
record several seconds of footage before the
start of recording.
For details about the video formats supported
for this function, see “Special Recording
Support by Recording Format” (page 161).
To start recording in Picture Cache Rec mode,
Picture Cache Rec mode and the storage time
of images in memory (Picture Cache Rec time)
must be set beforehand in the Operation
menu.
When recording is started, the duration of
footage that can be recorded retroactively is
determined by the Picture Cache Rec time. The
duration that can be recorded retroactively
may be reduced in some circumstances, as
described in [Notes] below.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The storage of video in memory starts when Picture
Cache Rec mode is selected. However, if recording
is started immediately after selecting this mode,
a portion of the images shot immediately prior
to selecting Picture Cache Rec mode will not be
recorded.
ˎˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback,
recording review, or thumbnail display, so recording of
images during these periods is not supported.
Setting the Picture Cache Rec time
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture
Cache Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache
viewfinder light as they do during normal
recording.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the Picture
To exit, stop the recording.
Rec Time in the setup menu.
Cache Rec time setting, then press the
knob.
The options will vary depending on the
recording format and system frequency
settings. See “Picture Cache Rec Mode
Settings” (page 162) in the Appendix.
Once Picture Cache Rec mode is selected, it is
maintained until the settings are changed.
Alternatively, instead of performing steps 1
and 2, you can also select Picture Cache Rec
mode using an assignable switch (page 120)
which has been assigned with the Picture
Cache Rec function.
[Notes]
ˎˎ With the exception of some functionsa), only one
special recording function, such as Picture Cache Rec,
can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ With the exception of some functionsa), if another
special recording mode is enabled while Picture
Cache Rec is in use, Picture Cache Rec is automatically
released.
ˎˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format,
clears all images stored in memory. Consequently,
images shot just before changing settings cannot
be recorded, if recording is started immediately
after changing settings. Picture Cache Rec mode is
automatically released.
ˎˎ The Picture Cache Rec time cannot be set during
recording.
a) Picture Cache Rec is also supported in 1-slot Simul
Rec mode.
Starting Picture Cache Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 44).
When recording starts, the “Cache”
indication in the viewfinder changes to the
“Rec” indication. The TALLY indicators and
the tally indicator on the front panel of the
Canceling Picture Cache Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation
>Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup
menu to Off.
Device operation when recording in
Picture Cache Rec mode
The recording procedure is essentially the
same, except for the following points where
operation varies from normal.
ˎˎIf recording is started while accessing media,
the actual start point of recording may be
delayed even longer than the set Picture
Cache Rec time. The delay increases with
the number of recorded clips, so stopping
recording and quickly restarting recording
should be avoided in Picture Cache Rec
mode.
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates
in F-RUN mode.
ˎˎIn Picture Cache Rec mode, time data
cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch to SET.
To set time data, first stop Picture Cache Rec
mode.
ˎˎIf the remaining recording time of the media
in the currently selected slot is shorter than
the Picture Cache Rec time, images are
recorded to the media (if there is sufficient
remaining recording time) in the nonselected slot.
However, images are not recorded if there is
no media in the non-selected slot or if the
media in the slot has insufficient remaining
recording time. (A message notifying you
47
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
that there is insufficient remaining recording
time will appear on the viewfinder screen.)
ˎˎShot marks are not recorded, even if the
shot marks are set before the recording start
operation.
Recording interval (Interval Time)
knob to select the number of frames to
record in one take, and then press the
knob.
You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format
is 50P or 59.94P.
You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the
format is 23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or
59.94i.
If the camcorder is turned off during
recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed
for several seconds to record the images
stored in memory up till that moment, and
then the power turns off automatically.
ˎˎIf the battery is removed, the DC cable
disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off
during recording, the video and audio data
stored in memory is erased, and images up
till that point are not recorded. Care should
be exercised when exchanging the battery.
Recording Time-lapse Video
(Interval Rec Function)
The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows
you to capture time-lapse video to the
camcorder’s internal memory. This function
is an effective way to shoot slow-moving
subjects.
When you start recording, the camcorder
automatically records a specified number of
frames at a specified interval time.
This function is enabled when the camcorder
is set to any of the following video formats
(page 32).
XAVC-I
XAVC-L
MPEG HD 422
3 Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU
4 Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob
Number of frames in one take
(Number of Frames)
A pre-lighting function is available when
Interval Rec is enabled. This function
automatically turns on the video light
before recording starts, which allows you to
record pictures under stable light and color
temperature conditions.
to select the desired interval, and then
press the knob.
You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50
sec, 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to
4/6/12/24 hour.
5 As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the
MENU knob to select the length of
lighting time before recording starts, and
then press the knob.
You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds, or Off.
[Notes]
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval
Rec recording, can be used at any one time.
If another special recording mode is enabled while
Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is
automatically released.
ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during
recording.
ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the
start of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT
switch to AUTO. The video light switch must also
be turned on. When this is done, the video light
turns on and off automatically. However, the
video light remains lit if the time that it would be
off is five seconds or less.
ˎˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and
turn the video light switch on, the video light is
always lit. (The video light does not turn on and
off automatically.)
Setting Interval Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval
Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode,
and “Int Stby” appears at the REC
indicator position on the viewfinder
screen. (The green tally indicator in the
HDVF series viewfinder also flashes.)
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when
it is powered off, but the number of frames,
interval time, and pre-lighting settings are
maintained. You do not need to set them
again the next time you shoot in Interval Rec
mode.
Starting Interval Rec recording
Make the settings and preparations described
in “Basic Operations” (page 44), secure the
camcorder so that it does not move, and begin
shooting.
When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “Int Stby”
appears at the REC position on the viewfinder
screen. When you start recording, “Int Rec”
and “Int Stby” are displayed alternately. The
TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they
do during normal recording. (The green tally
indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also
flashes at high speed.)
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the
video light comes on before recording starts.
To exit, stop the recording.
When shooting ends, the video data stored
in memory up to that point is written to the
media.
Canceling Interval Rec mode
Do one of the following.
ˎˎSet the POWER switch to OFF.
ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Operation
>Rec Function >Interval Rec in the setup
menu to Off.
[Note]
Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval
Rec mode.
Limitations during recording
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch, the advance mode of
the internal timecode generator is always
R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio is not recorded.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
48
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
If the camcorder is turned off during
recording
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set
to the OFF position, the media is accessed
for several seconds to record the images
stored in memory up till that moment, and
then the power turns off automatically.
ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery
was removed, the DC power cord was
disconnected, or the power was turned off
on the AC adaptor side, then the video and
audio data shot up to that point may be
lost (maximum 10 seconds). Care should be
exercised when exchanging the battery.
Recording
format
System
frequency
S&Q frame rate
HD422 50
1080P a)
29.97P
1 FPS to 30 FPS
(1 FPS units)
23.98P
25P
1 FPS to 25 FPS
(1 FPS units)
a) exFAT and UDF files systems are supported. Only
exFAT is supported for other recording formats.
By shooting with a frame rate that differs from
the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow
and quick motion effects that are smoother
than low-speed or high-speed playback of
content recorded at the normal frame rate.
Setting Slow & Quick Motion
Shooting with Slow & Quick
Motion
You can specify a recording frame rate that is
different from the playback frame rate.
[Note]
When shooting in XAVC recording format, use SxS PRO X
or SxS PRO+ type SxS memory cards.
Recording
format
System
frequency
S&Q frame rate
XAVC-I
3840P
59.94P/50P/
29.97P/23.98P/
25P
1 FPS to 60 FPS
(1 FPS units)
XAVC-L200
XAVC-L
3840P
XAVC-I
1080P
XAVC-L 50
1080P
XAVC-L 35
1080P
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow &
Quick Motion in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “S&Q
Stby” appears in the recording status
indicator area in the viewfinder.
If a frame rate of 60 FPS or higher has
been set beforehand, “HFR Stby” appears.
Next, set the frame rate.
3 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow &
Quick Motion >Frame Rate in the setup
menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select the frame
1 FPS to 60 FPS
(1 FPS units),
72/75/90/96/
100/120 FPS
rate, then press the knob.
When you finish making these settings, the
system frequency and the frame rate appear
at the top of the viewfinder screen. You can
change the frame rate while viewing the
display in the viewfinder by turning the MENU
knob.
The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and
the frame rate are retained even after the
camcorder is powered off.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow &
Quick Motion, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording function is enabled while
using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is
automatically canceled.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording,
playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter
function is set.
ˎˎ At 72 FPS or higher settings, the field of view becomes
half the normal picture size.
Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 44).
When recording starts, the “S&Q Stby”
indication in the viewfinder changes to the
“S&Q Rec” indication. If a frame rate of
60 FPS or higher has been set beforehand,
“HFR Rec” appears. The TALLY indicators
and the tally indicator on the front panel of
the viewfinder light as they do during normal
recording.
To exit, stop the recording.
[Note]
It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the
frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate).
Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Slow &
Quick in the setup menu to Off.
Limitations during recording
ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/
SET/R-RUN switch, the advance mode of
the internal timecode generator is always
R-RUN.
ˎˎAudio cannot be recorded when the
recording and playback frame rates differ.
ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
possible.
ˎˎIf you change the recording frame rate to a
value faster than the current shutter speed,
the shutter speed is changed to the slowest
value for which shooting is possible.
Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the
shutter speed is 1/40, and you change the
frame rate to 55, then the shutter speed is
changed to 1/60.
It is not possible to select a shutter speed
that is slower than the recording frame rate.
ˎˎGenlock is not possible.
Recording with the Clip
Continuous Rec Function
Normally, a clip is created as an independent
file each time that you start and stop
recording. But this function allows you to
start and stop recording while continuously
recording to the same clip, for as long as the
function remains enabled. This is convenient
when you do not want to generate a large
number of short clips, and when you want to
record without worrying about exceeding the
clip limit.
It is still easy to find recording start points,
because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded
at the recording start point each time you start
recording.
This function is enabled when the camcorder
is set to any of the following video formats
(page 32).
XAVC-I (excluding XAVC-I 3840×2160P)
XAVC-L (excluding XAVC-L 3840×2160P,
XAVC-L 200 2160P)
MPEG HD 422
49
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Setting Clip Continuous Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
“Cont Stby” flashes in the viewfinder, and
the function is enabled.
It turns on solid when recording stops.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip
Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while
Clip Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the
currently selected mode is automatically released.
You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off
function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE
button.
For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable
Switches” (page 120).
[Note]
Stop the recording after recording for two or more
seconds.
Operation >Format
>Rec Format in the
setup menu
Operation >Format
>Frequency in the setup
menu
Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
59.94/59/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
59.94/50
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Clip
Continuous Rec in the setup menu to Off.
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-L 35 1080P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
XAVC-L 35 1080i
59.94/50
XAVC-L 25 1080i
59.94/50
HD 422 50 1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HD 422 50 1080i
59.94/50
HD 422 50 720P
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080P
29.97/25/23.98
HQ 1920×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1440×1080i
59.94/50
HQ 1280×720P
59.94/50
Limitations during recording
A single continuous clip cannot be created if
you perform one of the following operations
while the camcorder is in recording or
recording standby mode. (A new clip will be
created when you next start recording.)
ˎˎOperate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a
clip)
ˎˎSwitch slots
ˎˎChange the recording format
ˎˎTurn off the POWER switch
ˎˎPlayback
ˎˎSwitch to the thumbnail screen
Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 44).
When recording starts, the “Cont Stby”
indication in the viewfinder changes to “Cont
Rec” indication.
The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on
the front panel of the viewfinder light as they
do during normal recording.
[Note]
During recording or in recording standby mode (when
“Cont Stby” indication is displayed), if you remove the
media, the battery, or the power source, the media
needs to be restored. It is not possible to restore media
on a device other than this camcorder.
Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 49) and then
remove the media.
To exit, stop the recording.
Setting 2-slot Simul Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul
Recording Video Simultaneously
to Two SxS Memory Cards (2-slot
Simul Rec)
When the video format (page 32) is set to
one of the options in the following table, you
can record the same video to two SxS memory
cards. This function is useful for making a
video backup while shooting.
[Notes]
ˎˎ It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be
formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before
use.
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not supported when the
file system is UDF.
ˎˎ SD cards cannot be used.
Starting 2-slot Simul Rec recording
1 Insert SxS memory cards in both memory
slots A and B.
The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and
B are lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B
appear in the viewfinder (page 19).
2 Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 44).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the
media is defective or if the media is write protected.
ˎˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media
becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot
continue, recording to that media stops but recording
to the other media continues.
To exit, stop the recording.
Canceling 2-slot Simul Rec mode
In recording standby mode, set Operation
>Rec Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu
to Off.
Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as 2-slot
Simul Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled
while using 2-slot Simul Rec, 2-slot Simul Rec is
automatically released.
ˎˎ 2-slot Simul Rec cannot be set during recording,
playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Recording 4K and HD Clips
Simultaneously to One SxS
Memory Card (1-slot Simul Rec)
This function allows you to record large file
size 4K QFHD video (main clip) and small file
size HD video (subclip), that can be used for
pre-editing, simultaneously to a single SxS
memory card.
The recording format of SxS cards that can be
used for 1-slot Simul Rec is 4K QFHD (XAVC-I
QFHD or XAVC-L QFHD).
The picture size and recording format of
subclips vary with the system frequency.
50
4. Shooting: Advanced Operations
Recording format of System
Recording
main clip
frequency format of
subclip
29.97, 25,
ˎˎXAVC-I
3840×2160P
23.98
ˎˎXAVC L200 2160P
ˎˎXAVC-L
3840×2160P
59.94, 50
MPEG HD422
1920×1080P,
XAVC-L50
1920×1080P
MPEG HD422
1920×1080i,
XAVC-L50
1920×1080P
To exit, stop the recording.
2 Load media in the other card slot.
Canceling 1-slot Simul Rec mode
3 Select Thumbnail >Copy Sub Clip >All Clips
With the camcorder in recording standby
mode, set Operation >Rec Function >4K & HD
(Sub) Rec in the setup menu to Off.
Playback of subclip recording format
1 Select Operation >Input/Output >Output
Format >HD 1920×1080 in the setup menu.
[Note]
SD cards cannot be used in 1-slot Simul Rec mode.
2 Select Operation >Rec Function >HD (Sub)
Playback Mode >On in the setup menu.
Setting 1-slot Simul Rec
1 Select Operation >Rec Function >4K & HD
(Sub) Rec in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
3 Press the PLAY button to start playback.
In this mode, only subclips can be played.
The 4K QFHD main clips are skipped.
Subclips can also be selected on the
thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
[Notes]
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions , only one
special recording function, such as 1-slot Simul
Rec, can be used at any one time.
ˎˎ With the exception of some functions a), if
another special recording mode is enabled
while using 1-slot Simul Rec, 1-slot Simul Rec is
automatically released.
ˎˎ 1-slot Simul Rec cannot be set during recording,
playback, or while the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
a) Picture Cache Rec is also supported in 1-slot
Simul Rec mode.
a)
3 Select HD (Sub) Rec Format, and specify
the subclip recording format.
Starting 1-slot Simul Rec recording
Shoot as described in “Basic Operations”
(page 44).
During recording, “/Sub” is displayed on the
right of the recording format (codec) indicator
on the viewfinder screen (page 17).
ˎˎ Subclips cannot be played when the 1-slot Simul
Rec function is set to Off.
ˎˎ Thumbnail menu clip operations (page 79)
on the thumbnail screen apply to the main
clip. Subclip operations are not supported. To
perform operations on a subclip, copy it as a
main clip as described in “Copying and Saving a
Subclip as a Main Clip” below, and then perform
clip operations.
Copying and Saving a Subclip as a
Main Clip
You can copy a subclip created using 1-slot
Simul Rec and save it as a main clip on other
media.
1 Load the media on which the subclip
created using 1-slot Simul Rec was
recorded into a card slot.
in the setup menu.
[Note]
Subclips cannot be selected individually.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All subclips are copied as main clips, and
a completion message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
51
4. Shooting
Proxy Data
Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video
data (H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This
lightweight proxy data can be used in the
same way as the original data, but it can be
transferred more quickly, for more efficient
viewing and editing.
During clip recording, proxy data is recorded
onto the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD
card slot.
PROXY SD card slot
By importing proxy data recorded on the SD
card into a computer, you can quickly check
the recorded content or perform rapid offline
editing.
You can record proxy data not only
simultaneously when recording on SxS
memory cards, but also independently from
recording to SxS memory cards.
Proxy Recording using the
Camcorder
ˎˎWhen recording simultaneously, proxy
recording will not start unless an SxS
memory card is inserted.
ˎˎWhen the camcorder has been turned on
for about 30 seconds, the
icon (media
status indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on
in the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen to
indicate that proxy recording is enabled.
If you start shooting while the
icon
is flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not
recorded.
ˎˎBefore removing an SD card from the
camcorder, always check that the ACCESS
indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is
not lit, then turn off the camcorder or
turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN
connection function.
To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN
connection function, make the following
settings in the setup menu.
– Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Setting to Off.
– Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to
Off.
ˎˎAttempting to remove the SD card while
either the proxy recording or wireless LAN
connection function is enabled may display
a warning (E91-1C0) in some cases. If the
warning appears while recording, data is
still recorded correctly to the SxS memory
cards, but proxy files are not recorded. The
warning message can be cleared by turning
the camcorder off and then on again.
ˎˎProxy recording will not start if Picture Cache
Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or
streaming is enabled.
ˎˎProxy recording cannot be performed when
the SDI output format is set to 3840×2160P.
SD Cards
SD cards supported for recording proxy data
ˎˎSDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or
higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
ˎˎSDXC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or
higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB)
* Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual.
Formatting (initializing) SD cards
SD cards must be formatted the first time they
are used in the camcorder.
SD cards for use in the camcorder should be
formatted using the format function of the
camcorder. If a message appears when the SD
card is inserted into the camcorder, format the
SD card.
1 Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
To use an SD card formatted on the
camcorder in the slot of another device
First, make a backup of the card, then reformat
the card in the device to be used.
Recording Proxy Data
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
3 Select Operation >Format Media >SD
Card(Proxy) in the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen prompting whether
to format the card appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Formatting begins.
During formatting, a message and
progress state (%) is displayed and the
ACCESS indicator is lit orange.
When formatting ends, a completion
message appears. Press the MENU knob
to dismiss the message.
[Note]
To record proxy data simultaneously
You can record proxy data to an SD card
simultaneously as the recording to SxS
memory cards.
1 Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Setting in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then
press the knob.
3 Insert an SD card for recording proxy data
into the PROXY SD card slot.
4 Start recording.
The proxy data file is saved in the
“/PRIVATE/PXROOT/Clip” directory of the
SD card at the same time as the original
data is being recorded onto an SxS
memory card.
Proxy data recording automatically stops
when you stop recording.
Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The
card cannot be restored.
[Note]
Checking the remaining recording
capacity
Recording proxy data simultaneously when the SDI
output format is 3840×2160P causes the SDI output
format setting to automatically switch to 1920×1080P
(Level-B).
You can check the remaining capacity on
an SD card on the Media Status screen
(page 14).
52
4. Shooting: Proxy Data
To record proxy data separately from
recording original data
You can record proxy data to an SD card
independent of the SxS memory cards by
assigning the XAVC Proxy Rec Start function to
an assignable switch.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If simultaneous proxy recording is started while
recording proxy data independently is in progress, the
proxy data recording continues without interruption.
Subsequently, when simultaneous recording is
stopped, proxy data recording also stops.
ˎˎ Proxy recording cannot be stopped independently
during simultaneous proxy recording.
Proxy recording limitations
Proxy recording is not supported in the
following cases.
ˎˎDuring streaming (Maintenance >Streaming
>Setting in the setup menu set to On)
ˎˎDuring Interval Rec (Operation >Rec
Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu set
to On)
ˎˎDuring Picture Cache Rec (Operation >Rec
Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup
menu is set to On)
ˎˎDuring Slow & Quick Motion (Operation
>Rec Function >Slow & Quick Motion in the
setup menu set to On)
ˎˎWhen network client mode is enabled
(Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu is set to On) and
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in
the setup menu is set to Disable.
ˎˎWhen Operation >Format >Frequency in the
setup menu is set to 23.98P and Operation
>XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size is set to HD
Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps)
ˎˎWhen power is being supplied to the
external device connector (Operation >USB
in the setup menu).
ˎˎThe maximum number of clips that can be
recorded is 600.
About the recorded files
ˎˎThe file name extension is “.mp4”.
ˎˎThe timecode is also recorded
simultaneously.
ˎˎA still image of the first frame is also
recorded simultaneously.
ˎˎLocation information and a Log file are
recorded simultaneously if the GPS function
is enabled. The Log file is saved in “Root/
PRIVATE/SONY/GPS.”
Canceling proxy data recording
Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting
in the setup menu to Off.
When there is insufficient remaining
capacity on an SD card
A warning is displayed to indicate that there is
insufficient free space.
Changing proxy recording settings
Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size
and Audio Channel in the setup menu to
change the settings for the size of the proxy
recording format and the audio channel for
proxy recording, respectively.
[Note]
When Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size in
the setup menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD
Auto(6Mbps) and the system frequency is set to 29.97 or
25, the proxy data picture size will be set to 1920×1080
even if the picture size of the recording video format is
set to 1280×720.
Checking proxy recording settings
Select Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
>Frame Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to
view the settings for the video frame rate and
video bit rate, respectively.
53
4. Shooting
Planning Metadata
Planning metadata is information about
shooting and recording plans, recorded in an
XML file.
You can shoot using clip names and shot
mark names defined in advance in a planning
metadata file.
You can send and receive planning metadata
using the “Content Browser Mobile”
application.
“Sort by” setting
Sort order
Item
Information
Date/Time (0-9)
Sort the file list in
ascending order in the
Date/Time column
(oldest creation date at
the top).
File Name
File name
Assign ID
Assign ID
Created
Date and time of creation
Modified
Date and time of most
recent modification
Modified by
Name of person who
modified the file
Title
Title1 specified in file (ASCII
format clip name)
Title2
Title2 specified in file
(UTF-8 format clip name)
Material
Group
Number of material
groups a)
Date/Time (9-0)
[Note]
Use a font set that is compatible with the language
set using Maintenance >Language in the setup menu
when defining clip names and shot mark names. Using
fonts for a language that is different from the language
setting on the camcorder may cause characters to be
displayed abnormally.
Sort the file list in
descending order in the
Date/Time column
(newest creation date at
the top).
4 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load and press the knob.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and
Loading a Planning Metadata File
into Camcorder Memory when
Recording a Clip
press the knob, then select [Execute] and
press the knob again.
[Note]
Planning metadata files can be loaded from SDXC cards
using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor. However,
data cannot be loaded from SDHC/SD cards.
Shot Mark0 to Names defined in file for
Shot Mark9
Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9
a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with
the same planning metadata.
You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the
list.
2 Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B.
3 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
>Load from Media(A) or Load from
Media(B) in the setup menu.
A file list screen appears.
Up to 512 planning metadata files are
displayed in the list.
You can change the file list sort order
using Operation >Planning Metadata >
Sort by in the menu.
The following two types of clip name strings
can be written in a planning metadata file.
ˎˎAn ASCII format name that appears in the
viewfinder
ˎˎA UTF-8 format name that is actually
registered as the clip name
You can select which type of clip name is
displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata
>Clip Name Disp in the setup menu.
When a clip name is set with planning
metadata, the clip name is displayed.
[Note]
When you define both an ASCII format name and a
UTF-8 format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8
format string is used as the clip name string. If you
define either an ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format
name with planning metadata, the defined format name
is displayed though it is not selected by menu setting.
Clip name string example
1 Save the planning metadata file on an SxS
memory card beforehand.
Planning metadata files are stored in the
“General/Sony/Planning” directory.
Defining Clip Names in Planning
Metadata
Displaying Detailed Information in
Planning Metadata
Clearing the Loaded Planning
Metadata
After loading planning metadata into the
camcorder, you can check the detailed
information that it contains, such as file
names, date and time of creation, and titles.
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata
>Properties in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
and then press the knob.
The planning metadata information is
displayed.
>Clear Memory in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
and then press the knob.
Deletion starts.
When the deletion ends, the following
message appears.
Clear Planning Metadata File
Done
Use a text editor to modify the two fields in
the <Title> tag that contain the clip name
strings.
The shaded fields in the example are clip
name strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII
format (up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_
Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8 format (up
to 44 bytes).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a
carriage return.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
P0001"spcreationDate="
2019-10-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
54
4. Shooting: Planning Metadata
lastUpdate="
2019-10-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
version="1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId="
assignment"spupdate="
2019-10-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp
xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo
</Title>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a
single line with a CRLF only after the last character in
the statement line, and do not enter spaces except
where specified.
ˎˎ The following characters cannot be used in clip
names. If they are used, they are replaced by an
underscore character (_).
" * / : < > ? \ |
ˎˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the
clip name.
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first
44 bytes are used as the clip name.
If only an ASCII format name is specified, a
44-character string is used as the clip name.
When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8
format name string can be used, the standard format
clip name is used.
Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After
the number reaches 99999, the next
increment returns the number to 00001.
[Note]
When you load another planning metadata file, the
serial number continues incrementing. You can change
the numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in
the setup menu.
Selecting the clip name display format
When names are defined in both ASCII format
and UTF-8 format, you can use Operation
>Planning Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the
setup menu to select which of the names
to display on the LCD monitor and on the
viewfinder screen.
To display ASCII format names:
Select Title1(ASCII).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_
SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen.
To display UTF-8 format names:
Select Title2(UTF-8).
The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_
Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name
is displayed on the screen.
Setting clip names
1 Load a planning metadata file that
contains clip names into camcorder
memory (page 100).
2 Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the
setup menu to Plan.
Each time that you record a clip, the
camcorder automatically generates a
name consisting of the clip name defined
in the planning metadata file, with the
addition of an underbar (_) and a fivedigit serial number (00001 to 99999).
Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001,
Defining Shot Mark Names in
Planning Metadata
When you use planning metadata to set shot
marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0
to Shot Mark 9.
When you record shot marks, you can add
the shot mark name strings defined in the
planning metadata.
[Note]
Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on
the camcorder.
Shot mark name string example
Use a text editor to modify the fields in the
<Meta name> tag.
The shaded fields in the example are essence
mark name strings. Names can be either in
ASCII format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8
format (up to 16 characters).
“sp” indicates a space and  indicates a
carriage return.
[Note]
If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character,
the maximum length of that string is 16 characters.
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
UTF-8"?>
<PlanningMetadata xmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
planningmetadata"spassignId="
H00123"spcreationDate="
2019-10-27T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
2019-10-27T15:00:00Z"spversion=
"1.00">
<PropertiessppropertyId=
"assignment"spclass="original"sp
update="2019-10-27T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
<TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
Football Game 27/10/2019</
Title>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
content="Goal"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
content="Shoot"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp
content="Corner Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp
content="Free Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp
content="Goal Kick"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp
content="Foul"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp
content="PK"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp
content="1st Half"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp
content="2nd Half"/>
<Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp
content="Kick Off"/>
</Properties>
</PlanningMetadata>
[Note]
When you create a definition file, enter each statement
as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character
in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except
where specified, except within essence mark name
strings.
55
4. Shooting
Obtaining Location Information (GPS)
Location and time information of video shot
when positioning is enabled is recorded
by the camcorder. That information is also
superimposed on the SDI signal output.
The GPS function is set to Off by factory
default.
Positioning Display
status
GPS reception state
Positioning
not
available
Location information
could not be obtained
because GPS signal
could not be received.
Move to a location
with a clear view of the
sky.
Searching
for
satellites
Searching for GPS
satellites. Several
minutes may be
required to acquire
satellites.
Positioning
A weak GPS signal is
being received.
Supported formats for GPS recording
GPS recording is supported in XAVC-I and
XAVC-L recording formats.
When a recording format that does not
support GPS recording is set, location
information can still be obtained on an SDI
output if SDI output is set to On (Operation
>Input/Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2
Output set to On).
[Note]
Location information is not output when the format is
SD SDI. Nor is it output during playback.
1 Check that the camcorder is in standby
state.
2 Set Operation >GPS to On in the setup
menu.
is displayed in the viewfinder when
the camcorder is seeking GPS satellites.
When positioning is established, location
information is recorded when shooting
video.
The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies,
depending on the signal reception from the
GPS satellites.
Positioning Display
status
Off
GPS reception state
No display GPS is set to Off or an
error occurred.
A GPS signal is being
received. Location
information can be
acquired.
A strong GPS signal is
being received.
Location information
can be acquired.
ˎˎIt may take some time to start acquiring
location information after turning on the
camcorder.
ˎˎIf a positioning icon is not displayed after
several minutes, there may be a problem
with signal reception. Start shooting without
location information, or move to an area
with a clear view of the sky. Shooting
when a positioning icon is not displayed
means that location information will not be
recorded.
ˎˎThe GPS signal may not be received when
indoors or near tall structures. Move to a
location with a clear view of the sky.
ˎˎThe recording of location information may
be interrupted, depending on the strength
of the received signal, even if a positioning
icon is displayed.
56
5. Network Configuration
Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder
The camcorder supports various network
functions. This section provides an overview
and detailed description of the network
connections and functions.
Configure a password in order to use network
functions using Access Authentication
>Password.
1 Connect the camcorder and router using a Network Function Overview
Connecting to the Internet using
wireless LAN
Transferring files recorded on the
camcorder to a server on the Internet
[Notes]
Connect the camcorder to the Internet using
the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor
(option), or modem (option).
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an
SD card and original files recorded on SxS
memory cards to a server on the Internet
when connected via a 3G/4G/LTE network,
access point, wired LAN router.
 (page 65)
ˎˎ The Access Authentication >Password setting is blank
when network functions are used for the first time
and after updating the software to version 2.0 or later
from a version prior to version 2.0 or updating to
version 3.1 or later from a version prior to version 3.1.
ˎˎ If a password is not configured, the Network menu
items in the setup menu are disabled (grayed out),
and network settings cannot be configured.
LAN cable.
 (page 61)
[Note]
The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required
if connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor
(option) or modem (option).
1 Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder.
You can transmit the video and audio
captured/played back with the camcorder via
the Internet or local network.
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Streaming using the streaming settings on
the camcorder
When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied)
Network Connection Overview
 (page 57)
Connecting devices using wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless
LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless
LAN Adaptor (option).
1 Select the wireless connection device.
IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied)  (page 57)
CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option)
 (page 57)
2 Select the wireless LAN access mode.
Wi-Fi Access Point mode  (page 58)
Wi-Fi Station mode  (page 59)
Connecting to the Internet using a LAN
cable
Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a
router using the network connector.
Transmitting streaming video and audio
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 63)
 (page 69)
1 Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder.
High-quality streaming using the Connection
Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony
Network RX Station (option) or C3 Portal
2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi
Using Wi-Fi remote control
When using the CBK-WA02 (option)
 (page 57)
Station mode and connect to the Internet.
 (page 63)
Using a modem
1 Attach the USB extension adaptor of the
CBK-NA1 (option).
 (page 61)
2 Connect the modem.
 (page 62)
 (page 70)
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control
built into the camcorder from a smartphone,
tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN
connection.
 (page 71)
Configuring from the web menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears
when the camcorder is accessed from a
browser on a device connected using a
wireless LAN connection.
 (page 73)
Supported network functions and
operating limitations
 (page 78)
57
5. Network Configuration
Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN
connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB
Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02
Wireless LAN Adaptor (option).
The following operations can be performed
between the camcorder and devices
connected using a wireless LAN.
[Note]
USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFUWLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used.
Remote operation via wireless LAN
The camcorder can be operated remotely
from a smartphone, tablet, or computer that is
connected using a wireless LAN.
File transfer via wireless LAN
Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the
camcorder SD card and original files (highresolution files) recorded on the camcorder
can be transferred to a server via a wireless
LAN.
Monitoring video via wireless LAN
You can create a stream (H.264) of the camera
picture or playback picture of the camcorder for
monitoring from a device via wireless LAN using
the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
“Content Browser Mobile” is an application
that can operate the camcorder remotely on
the device screen, while streaming content,
and can be used to configure the camcorder.
You can also transfer a cutout part of a file by
specifying In and Out points in the proxy file
(page 66).
Always check that you have the latest version
of the “Content Browser Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile”
application, contact your Sony sales or service
representative.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD
card in the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless
LAN.
ˎˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference
between the camcorder and wireless LAN
access point or terminal device, or the ambient
environment (such as wall materials) could shorten
the communication range or prevent connections
altogether. If you experience these problems, check
the connection/communication status after moving
the camcorder to a new location, or bringing the
camcorder and access point/terminal device closer
together.
Attaching the IFU-WLM3
1 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
Device
OS
Browser
Smartphone
Android 11/12
Chrome
iOS 15.x
Safari
Android 10/11
Chrome
iPadOS 15.x
Safari
Microsoft
Windows 10/11
Chrome
macOS 12.x
Safari
Tablet
Computer
[Notes]
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard,
and close the connector cover.
module connector.
Guard (supplied)
Attaching the CBK-WA02
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the
handle in the position shown in the
following diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a
Sony service representative.
Compatible Devices
You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer
to configure and operate the camcorder. The
supported devices, OS, and browsers are
shown in the following table.
If not using the IFU-WLM3
2 Attach the protective cap to the IFU-
Attachment bracket
WLM3.
3 Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector.
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor,
supplied with the CBK-WA02 (option), to
the attachment bracket.
ˎˎ The picture may not be depicted correctly, depending
on the version of your browser.
Operation with the following browser versions has
been verified.
Safari: 15
Chrome: 103
ˎˎ Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure
the USB extension adaptor.
[Note]
Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the IFU-WLM3.
58
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
Fixing screw
Guard (supplied)
8 Set the wireless LAN channel in
Smartphone/
Tablet
Maintenance >Network >Channel in the
setup menu (page 113).
USB extension adaptor
Computer
For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the
instruction manual supplied with the CBK-WA02.
[Notes]
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown
in the following diagram.
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB
extension adaptor into the USB wireless
LAN module connector.
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-WA02.
ˎˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station
in Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in the setup
menu enables connection to a 5 GHz access point.
ˎˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point
mode may not be displayed, depending on the CBKWA02 used.
ˎˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of
the CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for
outdoor use in your country or region. Check that the
use of the CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or
region. For details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation
manual.
If not using the CBK-WA02
Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard,
and close the connector cover.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension
adaptor.
7 Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB
connector of the USB extension adaptor.
Connecting using Wireless LAN
Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point
Mode)
The camcorder can connect to devices that are
set up as an access point.
Install “Content Browser Mobile” on the device
to connect before starting the connection
configuration.
[Note]
The default Wi-Fi Access Point password should not
be used as-is. Use a password generated using the
following procedure.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi
Access Point.
3 Execute Maintenance >Network >Regenerate
Password.
One-touch connection using NFCequipped devices
Devices that support NFC can be connected by
one touch using NFC.
1 Select [Settings] on the device and enable
the [NFC] function.
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
module connector.
2 Turn the camcorder on, and set
Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
59
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode
Connecting using WPS-equipped
devices
4 Activate the NFC function.
Devices that support WPS can be connected
using WPS.
to Wi-Fi Access Point.
Set NFC connection mode by executing
Maintenance >Network >NFC in the setup
menu or by pressing and holding an
assignable switch that has been assigned
with the NFC function for three seconds.
The NFC function can be used only when
is displayed on the screen.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds)
to appear on the screen. Wait until the
for
network “AP” (access point) wireless network
indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the
viewfinder screen.
5 Touch the device against the camcorder.
The device connects to the camcorder,
and “Content Browser Mobile” launches.
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds)
to enable access point mode. Wait until the
network “AP” (access point) indicator (page 18)
stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.
3 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
Smartphone/
Tablet
Computer
network SSID list, then enter a password
to connect.
For the camcorder SSID and password,
see Maintenance >Network >SSID &
Password (page 113) in the setup menu.
Access
point
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Wi-Fi Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
6 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
network SSID list, display Option, and
select WPS Push Button.
[Note]
The steps will vary depending on the device used.
ˎˎ Wake a sleeping device and unlock the lock screen
beforehand.
ˎˎ Continue to hold the device against the camcorder
without moving it until “Content Browser Mobile”
launches (1 to 2 seconds).
ˎˎ If a device with identical SSID has already been
registered, the device may not be able to be
connected, depending on the OS version of the
device. In this case, you can connect the device by
deleting the registered SSID from the device.
It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds)
to enable access point mode. Wait until the
network “AP” (access point) indicator (page 18)
stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 3 Open the device Network Settings or
Wi-Fi Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode
to Wi-Fi Access Point.
4 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi
5 Open the device Network Settings or
[Notes]
[Note]
Connecting using SSID and password on
the device
Connect by entering the SSID and password
on the device.
1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode
to Wi-Fi Access Point.
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
The camcorder can connect to an existing
wireless LAN access point as a client.
The device connects via the access point.
The connection can be established using the
setup menu or the web menu. This section
describes the method using the WPS function
in the setup menu.
For details about connecting using the
web menu, see “Connecting to an access
point in station mode without using WPS”
(page 75).
For details about connecting using the
network auto detection function or by manual
entry, see “Connecting to an Access Point
using the Setup Menu” (page 63).
Connecting to an access point using
WPS
If an access point supports the WPS function,
you can connect using a basic setting.
1 Turn the access point on.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to
On.
4 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode
to Wi-Fi Station.
60
5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN
[Note]
It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute)
to enable station mode. Wait until the network
indicator (page 18) signal strength icon stops
flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
5 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the
setup menu.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
7 Press the access point WPS button.
For details about WPS button operation,
refer to the instruction manual for the
access point.
When the connection is successful, the
network indicator (page 18) signal
strength icon will show a strength of 1 or
higher on the LCD monitor or in the
viewfinder.
[Note]
If the connection fails, perform the procedure again
from step 1.
8 Connect the device to the access point.
For details about how to connect, refer to
the instruction manual for each device.
61
5. Network Configuration
Connecting to the Internet
You can connect to the Internet using a wired
LAN or wireless LAN.
For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not
supplied) to the network connector on the
camcorder, and connect to the Internet via a
router.
For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet
using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor
(option), or modem (option).
Limitations on simultaneous use of
network connection function
[Notes]
Computer
The camcorder can connect to a network using
wireless LAN or wired LAN methods.
However, there are limits on the simultaneous
use of these connection functions.
For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous
Use of Network Functions” (page 78).
Router
Required device for network connection
Wireless LAN connection
One of the following devices is required.
ˎˎIFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module
(supplied)
ˎˎCBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) +
CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied
with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit
(option)
ˎˎModem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option)
Wired LAN connection
Connecting Using a LAN Cable
(Wired LAN Connection)
Internet
You can connect to the Internet using a wired
LAN connection via a router connected to the
network connector on the camcorder.
[Notes]
ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for
peripheral device wiring that might have excessive
voltage to this port. Follow the instructions for this
port.
ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to
peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to
prevent malfunction due to radiation noise.
1 Connect the network connector of the
camcorder and a router using a LAN cable.
Preparation for Connection to the
Internet Using a Modem
ˎˎLAN cable (not supplied)
[Notes]
ˎˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in
some countries/regions.
ˎˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module
is shared by various devices. Depending on the
use environment, transmission speed and distance
may be decreased, or communication may be
disconnected, by using other devices.
ˎˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract
with a cell phone company.
ˎˎ For details about the required compatible device for
the network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a
Sony service representative.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute)
for the wired LAN connection to become enabled.
Wait until the network status indicator (page 18)
LAN icon stops flashing on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
ˎˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the
camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the
web menu, or monitor output using the “Content
Browser Mobile” application, set Maintenance
>Network >Wired LAN Remote in the setup menu to
On (page 114).
ˎˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable,
that will not be used to connect to the Internet, it is
recommended that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to
prevent unauthorized access from the Internet. When
connecting to the Internet, check that the network
connection is to a secure network before use.
ˎˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem
(option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module
connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the
modem (option).
ˎˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station
mode and the wired LAN is not connected to the
Internet, a network error may occur and Internetrelated functions may not operate. In this case, set
Wired LAN to Disable, and connect to the Internet
using Wi-Fi Station mode only.
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to
On.
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to
Enable.
An IP address is automatically assigned to
the camcorder.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
via a 3G/4G network by connecting an
optional modem to the unit.
You can connect the CBK-NA1E USB Extension
Adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network
Adaptor Kit (option), to the USB wireless
LAN module connector on the camcorder in
preparation for connection using the following
procedure.
You can also connect to the Internet using a
smartphone network by attaching a USB cable
to the USB wireless LAN module connector of
the unit and connecting a smartphone.
62
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
1 Attach the attachment bracket to the
handle in the position shown in the
following diagram.
For attachment of the attachment bracket
(Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a
Sony service representative.
Attachment bracket
For details about connecting a modem, refer to the
instruction manual supplied with the modem.
4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the
USB connector of the USB extension
adaptor.
attachment bracket.
the USB extension adaptor.
Fixing screw
USB extension adaptor
On.
Connecting Using a Modem
3 Set Maintenance >Network >Modem to
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
via a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem
(option) to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1
Network Adaptor Kit (option).
[Notes]
On.
2 Attach the USB extension adaptor to the
3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure
2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to
5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN
Internet
module connector.
Guard (supplied)
CBK-NA1
+
Modem
You can adjust the position of the USB
extension adaptor over the range shown
in the following diagram.
ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or
removing the CBK-NA1 and modem.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable modem mode. Wait until the 3G/4G modem
settings/connection status indicator (page 17)
stops flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
Connecting
6 Plug the USB connector of the USB
extension adaptor into the USB wireless
LAN module connector.
1 Connect the modem (option) to the USB
connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension
adaptor.
Connecting Using the Network
Setup Assist Tool
Using the network setup assist tool, you
can create a QR code with the information
required to access the camcorder via a C3
Portal connection. Loading the created
QR code onto a smartphone allows you to
quickly connect to the camcorder via C3 Portal
connection.
To use this function, first install the C3 Portal
dedicated app on your smartphone.
63
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
1 Plug the USB cable connected to a
smartphone into the USB wireless LAN
module connector.
2 Turn the camcorder on.
3 Select Maintenance >Setup for Mobile
App >Setup in the menu.
A screen appears showing the settings
that will be changed automatically to
enable connection with C3 Portal.
[Note]
Setup cannot be executed when both Maintenance
>Network Client Mode is set to On in the menu and
streaming is in progress.
(MONI)” or “Status display (STATUS)” mode.
Switch to “Video with superimposed information
(CHAR)” mode using the DISP SEL button
(page 8).
Smartphone/
Tablet
First, turn the access point and device on,
and configure the device tethering function if
planning to use tethering.
Computer
5 Launch the C3 Portal dedicated app
installed on your smartphone, and scan
the QR code using the camera of the
smartphone.
For details about using the dedicated app,
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide.
Connecting to an Access Point
using the Setup Menu
Access
point
Internet
The required information for accessing
the camcorder is loaded into the
smartphone.
For details about the dedicated app, visit
the C3 Portal site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
You can connect to an access point using the
setup menu.
The connection can be established using the
network auto detection function or by manual
entry.
Connection using network auto
detection function
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an
4 Check the settings and select OK.
The configuration starts. A “Processing”
message appears while configuration is in
progress.
When the configuration is completed, the
required information and a QR code for
accessing the unit is displayed.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Take care that the password cannot be viewed
and the QR code image cannot be copied by
others.
ˎˎ The QR code screen appears on the LCD monitor,
but it is not displayed when the LCD monitor is
set to “Video without superimposed information
Connecting Using Wireless LAN
Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode)
You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi
station mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3
USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBKWA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) to the
camcorder, and using a 3G/4G/LTE-compatible
access point (option) or using device tethering.
For details about attaching devices, see
“Attaching the IFU-WLM3” (page 57) and
“Attaching the CBK-WA02” (page 57).
access point using WPS” (page 59).
Smartphone/
Tablet
Internet
2 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi
Station Detail Settings >Scan Networks in
the setup menu, then select [Execute].
The camcorder starts detection of
connection destinations. Detected
destinations for connection are displayed
in the Scan Networks result list.
[Note]
Close the list display first if you want to turn the
camcorder off.
Connecting Using a Device
If the access point and device supports WPS,
connect using the procedure in “Connecting
to an access point using WPS” (page 59).
If WPS is not supported, connect using
the procedure in “Connecting to an access
point in station mode without using WPS”
(page 75).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination to which to connect, then
press the knob.
When the connection is established, the
Password input screen appears.
64
5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet
4 Set the password on the Password input
screen.
After setting the password, the display
returns to the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings
screen.
If information about a previous connected
destination is stored in the device history,
selecting the SSID for that destination
displays the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings
screen.
5 Configure the following connection
settings on the Wi-Fi Station Detail
Settings screen.
Item
Description
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP
address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to
Off.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of
the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the
address of the DNS server
is obtained automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS
server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS
Auto is [Off].
Item
Description
Item
Description
Secondary
DNS Server
Enter the secondary DNS
server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS
Auto is [Off].
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP
address is automatically
assigned to the
camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to
Off.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of
the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled only when DHCP
is [Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the
address of the DNS server
is obtained automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS
server for the access
point.
Enabled only when DNS
Auto is [Off].
6 When finished, select Set >Execute to
apply the settings.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select
Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured
settings are not applied.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
(page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
ˎˎ The connection station setup information is stored
in the history. The history can be cleared using ALL
Reset and Network Reset.
Connection by manual entry
1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an
access point using WPS” (page 59).
2 Configure the following connection
settings using Maintenance >Network
>Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings in the setup
menu.
Item
Description
SSID
Enter the SSID for the
destination to which to
connect.
Password
Enter the password for the
access point to connect.
The entered password is
displayed using asterisks.
The entered characters
are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
Secondary DNS Enter the secondary DNS
Server
server for the access
point.
Enabled only when DNS
Auto is [Off].
3 When finished, select Set >Execute to
apply the settings.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select
Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured
settings are not applied.
ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to
enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator
(page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the
LCD monitor or in the viewfinder.
65
5. Network Configuration
Transferring Files
You can transfer proxy files recorded on an
SD card and original files recorded on SxS
memory cards to a server on the Internet
when connected to the Internet via a 3G/4G/
LTE network, access point, or wired LAN router.
Transferring Proxy Files using the
Thumbnail Screen
You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD
card to a server using the thumbnail screen of
the camcorder.
2 Select OK.
Setting a Transfer Destination
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet
using the procedures in “Connecting
Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 57)
and “Connecting to the Internet”
(page 61).
2 You must first register a server to which
you want to transfer files.
For details about registering a server, see
“To register a destination server”
(page 76).
Configuring the Transfer
Destination Using the Dedicated
App (smartphone connection)
You can send the settings required for file
transfer from a smartphone to the camcorder
when connected to C3 Portal using a
smartphone (page 62).
1 Send the file transfer information to the
camcorder using the dedicated app on a
smartphone.
For details about using the dedicated app,
refer to the dedicated app Help Guide.
If the camcorder receives the file transfer
information successfully, the following
message appears.
The setup information starts loading.
When the setup is loaded successfully, a
“Network File loaded.” message appears.
Items configured automatically
For items configured automatically, see
“To register a destination server”
(page 76).
[Note]
Service, Show Password, and Load Certification
are not included in the items that are configured
automatically.
For details about the dedicated app, visit the
C3 Portal site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
Transferring Proxy Files using the
Web Menu
You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD
card to a server using the web menu.
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
Using “Content Browser Mobile”
application version 2.0 or later, you can
quickly display a thumbnail for a proxy file
on an SD card by using the still image of
the first frame.
4 Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second
time to de-select it. You can double-tap a
file to play the file to check its content.
5 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register
a destination server” (page 76)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and
then select a different server. Enter the
directory on the destination server, as
required.
You can select a transfer destination
using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default
Upload Server in the setup menu.
a LAN connection, then launch a browser
on the device to access the camcorder.
and select [Media Info], then tap
[SD Card].
The SD Card screen appears.
1 Select a transfer destination previously
registered in the web menu.
You can select a transfer destination
using the web menu or using
Maintenance >File Transfer >Default
Upload Server in the setup menu.
2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display
the thumbnail screen.
3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy)
>Select Clip in the setup menu.
A transfer file selection screen appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor
to a file (clip) to be transferred, then press
the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected
clip.
To clear the check mark from a selected
clip, press the MENU knob again.
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and
2 Display a file list screen to select files.
3 Tap
Transferring a specific proxy file
6 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To
cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel].
press the SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
The selected file is registered in the job
list, and a registration completed
message appears.
66
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Transferring all proxy files
You can transfer all proxy files recorded on an
SD card at the same time.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Proxy files for which there are no original files cannot
be selected for transfer on the thumbnail screen.
ˎˎ Proxy files that are not displayed on the transfer file
selection screen cannot be transferred.
1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >All
Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All files are registered in the job list, and a
registration completed message appears.
The file transfer starts transferring files in
the order the files were registered in the
job list.
You can check the registered files by
displaying the transfer job list using
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List
in the setup menu.
Transferring automatically when
recording finishes
If Maintenance >File Transfer >Auto
Upload(Proxy) in the setup menu is set to On
beforehand, the file is automatically uploaded
to the specified server when proxy recording
finishes.
If a proxy file with an identical duration as
the original file, inheriting the information
from the original file, is recorded based on
planning metadata, a folder is created on the
transfer destination with a name defined by
the content of the <Title> tag of the planning
metadata file, and the proxy file is transferred
to that folder.
When transferring, the ID of the recording
media is automatically appended to the file
name of the planning metadata file.
Transferring parts of proxy files
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out
points in proxy files to cut out and transfer the
cutout parts.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
multiple files using the Storyboard.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after
the cutout region in the created file.
ˎˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded
using network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may
not be imported into non-linear editors.
ˎˎ When partial transfer is performed using the
Storyboard, the file for sending Storyboard
information to a non-linear editor is displayed in the
Job List.
ˎˎ When transferring, a General/Sony/tmp folder is
created automatically on the SD card. The file is
temporarily stored in this folder, and is automatically
deleted after the file transfer is completed.
ˎˎ Files cannot be transferred under the following
conditions.
‒‒ When Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode is set to
Wi-Fi Access Point, and Wired LAN is set to Disable
in the setup menu
‒‒ When the streaming function is enabled
(Maintenance >Streaming >Setting is set to On)
‒‒ When network client mode is enabled and highquality streaming is in progress (streaming when
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting is set
to On)
Transferring Original Files using
the Web Menu
You can upload original files recorded on an
SxS memory card to a server using the web
menu.
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
a LAN connection, then launch a browser
on the device to connect to the camcorder
“Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN”
(page 57).
7 Tap [Transfer].
The default destination server specified in
[Default Setting] appears (see “To register
a destination server” (page 76)).
To change the destination server, tap the
destination server to display a list and then
select a different server.
Enter the directory on the destination
server in [Directory].
You can select a transfer destination
using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default
Upload Server in the setup menu.
2 Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File
Transfer in the setup menu.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Original file transfer mode is initiated.
4 Display a file list screen to select files in
the browser on the device.
5 Tap
and select [Media Info], then tap
Slot A (for files recorded on media in slot
A) or Slot B (for files recorded on media in
slot B).
The Slot A or Slot B screen appears.
Example: Slot A screen
6 Select the files you want to transfer.
Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second
time to de-select it.
8 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files begins. To
cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel].
When the transfer of all files is completed,
transfer mode is automatically released,
and the display returns to the camera
shooting screen.
67
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Transferring Original Files using
the Thumbnail Screen
You can upload original files recorded on
an SxS memory card to a server using the
thumbnail screen.
Transferring an original file
1 Select a transfer destination previously
registered in the web menu.
You can select a transfer destination
using the web menu or using
Maintenance >File Transfer >Default
Upload Server in the setup menu.
2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display
the thumbnail screen.
3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >Select
Clip in the setup menu.
A transfer file selection screen appears.
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor
to a file (clip) to be transferred, then press
the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected
clip.
To clear the check mark from a selected
clip, press the MENU knob again.
5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and
press the SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
The selected file is registered in the job
list, and a registration completed
message appears.
Transferring all original files
Transferring parts of original files
You can transfer all original files recorded on
an SxS memory card at the same time.
Using “Content Browser Mobile” application
version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/
Out points in original files recorded by the
camcorder to cut out and transfer the cutout
parts.
You can also transfer the cutout portions of
multiple files using the Storyboard.
The following formats of original files are
supported.
ˎˎXAVC-I
ˎˎXAVC-L
ˎˎHD422 (exFAT/UDF)
ˎˎHD420HQ (exFAT/UDF)
1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >All Clips
in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All files are registered in the job list, and a
registration completed message appears.
The file transfer starts transferring files in
the order the files were registered in the
job list.
You can check the registered files by
displaying the transfer job list using
Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List
in the setup menu.
If Maintenance >File Transfer >Remote File
Transfer in the setup menu is set to Enable
beforehand, original file transfer mode is
initiated automatically without having to set
file transfer mode.
[Note]
To transfer a part of an original file using “Content
Browser Mobile,” a proxy file with the same file name as
the original file is required.
Enable the creation of proxy files before you start to
record.
The relevant settings are shown below.
ˎˎ Set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in the
setup menu to On.
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled, set
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset
2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to
Enable.
Checking the Status of File
Transfer
Monitoring using the web menu
Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B
screen to display the Job List screen to check
the status of the file transfer (page 77).
Monitoring using the setup menu
Select Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job
List in the setup menu to display the Job List
screen.
You can check the status of file transfer on the
Job List screen.
Item
Description
Src.
Transfer clip source media
indicator
A: Slot A media
B: Slot B media
P: PROXY SD card slot media
Clip Name
Name of transfer clip
Destination
Transfer clip destination server
[Note]
Files cannot be transferred under the following
conditions.
ˎˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the
thumbnail screen
ˎˎ When both Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network
is set to Wi-Fi Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable is
set to Disable in the setup menu.
ˎˎ When the streaming function is enabled
(Maintenance >Streaming >Setting is set to On)
ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled and highquality streaming is in progress (streaming when
Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting is set
to On)
68
5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files
Item
Description
Status
Transfer status
Completed: Transfer completed
Transferring: Transfer in progress
Aborted: Transfer aborted
Waiting: Transfer pending
Server Cap. Over: Transfer
destination server capacity
exceeded (“E03-006”
displayed in Job List
(page 77) in the web
menu)
Upload Error: Transfer
destination server upload
error (“E03-003” displayed in
Job List (page 77) in the
web menu)
Dest. Auth. Failed: Transfer
destination server
authentication error (“E03005” displayed in Job List
(page 77) in the web
menu)
Dest. Cert. Err.: Transfer
destination certificate error
(“E03-008” displayed in Job
List (page 77) in the web
menu)
Deleting Transfer Files on the Job
List Screen of the Camcorder
You can select and delete any registered
transfer files on the Job List screen.
[Note]
Delete files one at a time. Multiple files cannot be
deleted simultaneously.
1 On the Job List screen, turn the MENU
knob to move the cursor to a file you want
to delete.
2 Press the MENU knob.
A confirmation message appears, asking
if you want to delete.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A deletion completion message appears.
Deleting all registered transfer files
Tap [Clear All jobs] on the Job List screen.
Deleting all completed transfer jobs
Tap [Clear Completed jobs] on the Job List
screen.
69
5. Network Configuration
Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio
You can transmit the video and audio
captured/played back with the camcorder via
the Internet or local network.
Preparation for Streaming
Transmission
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet
using the procedures in “Connecting
Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 57)
and “Connecting to the Internet”
(page 61).
2 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in
Maintenance >Streaming in the setup
menu.
The streaming connection destination
setup screen appears.
assignment, see “Assigning Functions to
Assignable Switches” (page 120).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following
menu settings.
‒‒ When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup
menu is set to Off
‒‒ When Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting
in the setup menu is set to On
‒‒ When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup
menu is set to On, but Maintenance >Network >WiFi Mode is set to Off and Maintenance >Network
>Wired LAN is set to Disable
ˎˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual
video or audio after starting streaming.
ˎˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD
format clip.
ˎˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is
set incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect
to the network, “×” appears on the screen as the
streaming status indicator.
ˎˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 70),
monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not
available after switching to streaming mode.
ˎˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording,
or transferring files will stop the corresponding
function.
3 Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items
according to Type on the screen.
For details and limitations about settings,
see “Streaming Settings” (page 74).
4 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in
steps 1 and 2, in Maintenance >Streaming
>Preset Select in the setup menu.
Starting Streaming
1 Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in
the setup menu to On.
Streaming starts according to the
settings.
You can assign Streaming to an
assignable switch. For details about
Stopping Streaming
Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to
stop streaming.
When Streaming is On, streaming can also be
stopped by pressing the assignable switch to
which Streaming has been assigned.
When the camcorder is connected to a
device via Wireless LAN (page 57) or is
connected to the Internet using wireless LAN
station mode (page 59), you can also set
the streaming transmission destination and
start/stop streaming from the web menu
(page 73).
70
5. Network Configuration
Streaming High Quality Video
High-quality streaming using Sony QoS
technology is supported by enabling network
client mode and connecting to the Connection
Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony
Network RX Station (option) or C3 Portal.
Higher quality, stable streaming can be
achieved using multiple networks.
Item
Description
CCM Port
Enter the port number of
the CCM to connect.
User Name
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
The entered password is
displayed using asterisks.
The entered characters
are visible while the SHIFT
key is pressed.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Use V1.18.2 or later for the Network RX Station.
ˎˎ To stream stably using multiple networks, use a
different carrier line for each network.
ˎˎ When using multiple networks, the target bit rate may
be exceeded depending on the scene being shot.
ˎˎ C3 Portal is a cloud service that is provided by Sony.
To use this service, registration is required.
C3 Portal is not provided in some regions. For details
on areas where the service is provided, refer to the
following site.
https://www.c3p.sony.net
In addition, refer to the following sites for the privacy
policy of C3 Portal.
‒‒ Terms of service
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/tos_eu.html
‒‒ C3 Portal privacy policy
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/c3p_privacy_policy.
html
‒‒ Professional ID privacy policy
https://www.pro-id.sony.net/#/privacyPolicy
ˎˎ For more details, contact a Sony professional sales
representative.
1 Connect the camcorder to the network.
For details, see “Connecting Devices using
Wireless LAN” (page 57) and
“Connecting to the Internet” (page 61).
2 Configure the network settings of the
destination to which to connect in
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 in the
setup menu.
You can save network settings of a
destination to which to connect as a
preset in Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3.
Item
Description
CCM Address
Enter the address of the
CCM to connect. (Host
name or IP address)
NCM with
Proxy
Enable/disable proxy
recording when
connected with a CCM.
Camera Control Enable/disable camera
control when connected
with a CCM.
Camera Setting Enable/disable ALL file
handling when connected
with a CCM.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set if values are
not entered for all items.
ˎˎ Setting Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy
in the setup menu to Enable enables proxy
recording, even when network client mode is
enabled. To enable the NCM with Proxy setting,
set Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting in
the setup menu to On.
ˎˎ If Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset
1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the
setup menu is set to Disable, proxy recording
stops if network client mode is set to On during
recording.
If original file recording is continuing, set both to
Off to restart proxy recording.
ˎˎ If Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Proxy
File >Size in the setup menu is set to HD
Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps), NCM with
Proxy cannot be enabled.
If HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) is set
after NCM with Proxy is set to Enable, the
setting is maintained, but proxy recording is not
performed.
3 Select one of the presets, set in step 1, in
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Preset Select in the setup menu.
4 Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Setting in the setup menu to On.
Network client mode is enabled, and the
camcorder connects to the Network RX
Station or C3 Portal.
Live streaming starts in response to
Network RX Station operation. An ALL file
can also be saved/loaded using remote
control of the unit by the Network RX
Station.
For details about operation, refer to the
instruction manual for the Network RX
Station or the Help Guide for C3 Portal.
You can assign Setting (On/Off) for
Network Client Mode to an assignable
switch. For details about assignment, see
“Assigning Functions to Assignable
Switches” (page 120).
[Notes]
ˎˎ Changing to network client mode during normal
streaming (page 69) is not possible.
ˎˎ After changing to network client mode, normal
streaming (page 69) and monitoring are not
available.
ˎˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring
will stop the monitoring.
ˎˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in
network client mode. File transfer is supported after
stopping streaming.
ˎˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during
file transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer
restarts after stopping streaming.
ˎˎ The available streaming bit rates that can be
configured by the Network RX Station are limited
to the following, depending on the proxy recording
format.
‒‒ If the proxy recording format is 1280×720
9Mbps/6Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 1
Mbps or lower.
‒‒ If the proxy recording format is 640×360 3Mbps,
the streaming bit rate is set to 3 Mbps or lower.
ˎˎ The proxy format cannot be changed in network
client mode. To change the format, first set Network
Client Mode to Off.
ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set to On when
Maintenance >Network >Modem Remote is set to On
in the menu.
Transferring files in network client mode
You can transfer files to a server set by a CCM
by connecting the camcorder in network
client mode to the CCM of either a Network RX
Station or C3 Portal.
1 Select the files you want to transfer.
ˎˎTo transfer a proxy recording:
Follow steps 1 to 5 in “Transferring
Proxy Files using the Web Menu”
(page 65).
ˎˎTo transfer original files:
Follow steps 1 to 6 in “Transferring
Original Files using the Web Menu”
(page 66).
2 Tap [Transfer].
“NCM: RX Server” is displayed as a
destination.
Specify “NCM: RX Server” as the
destination.
3 Tap [Transfer].
Transfer of the selected files to the server
specified on the CCM starts.
[Note]
The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server”
when not in network client mode.
In this case, transfer is placed on hold, and then
transfer to the server specified on the CCM starts after
connecting to the CCM in network client mode.
71
5. Network Configuration
Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
You can access the Wi-Fi remote control
built into the camcorder from a smartphone,
tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN
connection.
Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to
operate the camcorder remotely. This allows
you to start/stop recording or configure
settings remotely, and is useful in applications
where the camcorder is fixed in a remote
location or mounted on a crane, for example.
Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote
Control
The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically
resized to match the screen size of the
connected device.
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet
using the procedures in “Connecting
Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 57)
and “Connecting to the Internet”
(page 61).
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL
bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP
address (Maintenance >Network >IP
Address (Wireless) in the setup menu) of
the camcorder.
For example, if the IP address is
192.168.1.1, enter “http://192.168.1.1/
rm.html” in the URL bar.
3 Enter the user name and password
(Maintenance >Access Authentication
(page 112) in the setup menu) on the
browser screen.
When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi
Remote screen appears on the device.
You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to
operate the camcorder.
You can disable the REC button operation
by sliding the Lock knob to the right on
the screen.
You can also display the Wi-Fi remote
control using [Cam Remote Control]
(page 73) from the web menu.
Wi-Fi Remote Screen
(Smartphones)
Cursor screen
ˎˎ Status indicators
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons,
menu/status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down,
Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT
+ SET)
Main screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Shooting settings
Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS,
Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto
Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars,
Auto Black, Auto White
[Notes]
ˎˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm.
html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for
a tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL.
When “rm.html” is entered, the page automatically
switches for display on the corresponding device.
However, the appropriate page may not be displayed,
depending on the device.
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match
the camcorder settings under the following
circumstances. If this occurs, reload the browser
window.
‒‒ If the camcorder is restarted while connected
‒‒ If the camcorder is operated directly while
connected
‒‒ If the device has been reconnected
‒‒ If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been
used
ˎˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the
wireless signal strength becomes weak.
Assign screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
Playback screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd,
Prev, Stop, Next
72
5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control
Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets)
Cursor screen
Main screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/status display
Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status,
Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET)
Assign screen
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Shooting settings
S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW,
Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White
Playback screen
ˎˎ Assignable switches
Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5
ˎˎ Status display
ˎˎ Playback control buttons
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next
73
5. Network Configuration
Configuring from the Web Menu
The web menu of the camcorder appears
when the camcorder is accessed from a
browser on a device connected using a
wireless LAN connection. Using the web menu,
you can configure settings related to wireless
functions, transfer files, and perform other
actions.
screen will display the configuration menus.
Tap the item you want to configure.
The menu has the following items: Settings,
Media Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control.
Settings
Used to configure the camcorder. This screen
has the following items.
Displaying the Web Menu
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet
using the procedures in “Connecting
Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 57)
and “Connecting to the Internet”
(page 61).
2 Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in
the URL bar.
The user name and password entry
screen appears.
3 Enter a user name and password, then
select [OK].
For the user name and password for
access authentication, see Maintenance
>Access Authentication (page 112) in
the setup menu.
Setup Menu
Launch a browser on the device and enter
“http://<IP_address>:8080” in the URL
bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP address
(Maintenance >Network >IP Address in the
setup menu) of the camcorder, to display the
Media Info >SD Card screen of the camcorder.
Tapping
in the top left of the web menu
Item
Description
See
Wireless
Module
>Streaming
Format
Streaming
format
settings
Streaming
Format Settings
(page 73)
Proxy format
Wireless
settings
Module
>Proxy Format
Wireless
Module
>System
Settings
Proxy Format
Settings
(page 74)
Load Network System Settings
Client Mode
(page 74)
Settings
certificate
(execute
using Load
button of
Load
Certification)
Wireless LAN
>Station
Settings
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
settings
Station Settings
(page 75)
Wireless LAN
>Status
Wireless LAN Checking
wireless LAN
settings
settings
status
(page 75)
Wired LAN
>Wired LAN
Settings
Wired LAN
settings
Wired LAN
>Status
Wired LAN
settings
status
Checking wired
LAN settings
(page 76)
Upload
Settings
Transfer
settings
Transfer (Upload)
Settings
(page 76)
Wired LAN
Settings
(page 75)
Media Info
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
Displays media information and is used to
select files to transfer from media.
ˎˎSD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD
card slot of the camcorder.
Double-clicking a file will start playback of
the selected file.
Audio
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
[Note]
Playback may not be supported, depending on the
operating system of the terminal device used and the
browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser
Mobile.”
ˎˎSlot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the
camcorder
ˎˎSlot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the
camcorder
Job List
Displays the Job List screen for managing file
transfers (page 77).
Cam Remote Control
Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen
(page 71).
OSS Information
Displays copyright information.
Streaming Format Settings
You can configure the stream for monitoring
by devices, and set the format and
transmission destination of the stream for
streaming via the Internet or local network.
Video
ˎˎAVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP
Monitoring Settings
You can set the format for monitoring by
devices.
Item
Description
Monitoring
Size
Sets the video size 480×270(1Mbps)/
and bit rate for
480×270(0.5Mbps)
monitoring.
Setting
Monitoring Displays the video 23.98fps/25fps/
29.97fps/50fps/
Frame Rate frame rate for
59.94fps
monitoring.
Monitoring
Bit Rate
Displays the video 1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
bit rate for
monitoring.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎ 640×360 (3Mbps (VBR)) is not supported for
Monitoring Size.
74
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Streaming Settings
Item
You can set the format and transmission
destination for streaming. Up to three settings
can be preset.
Item
Description
Setting
On/Off
Switches
streaming
transmission on/
off.
On/Off
Preset
Selects the preset
from Preset 1 to
Preset 3. You can
edit Preset by
tapping Edit.
Preset1/
Preset2/Preset3
Selects the type
of video for
streaming.
MPEG-2 TS/
UDP/
MPEG-2 TS/
RTP
Sets the size of
video for
streaming.
When HD Auto is
selected, the size
is set to
1920×1080 or
1280×720,
according to the
setting of the
recording format
recorded on the
SxS memory card
or the format of
the clip to be
played back.
HD Auto/
1280×720/
640×360/
480×270/
320×180
Sets the bit rate of
video for
streaming.
The selectable bit
rate varies
depending on the
Size setting.
9Mbps/6Mbps/
3Mbps/2Mbps/
1Mbps/0.5Mbps/
0.3Mbps(Mono L)/
0.3Mbps(Mono R)/
0.2Mbps(Mono L)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R)
Type
Size
Bit Rate
Description
Setting
Destination Enter the address Host name or IP
address
Address
of the
transmission
destination server
for streaming
data.
1 to 65535
Destination Enter the port
Port
number of the
transmission
destination server
used for
streaming.
Audio
Channel
Select
Selects the audio Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
channels for the
streaming output.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function
cannot be used.
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet.
Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to
other parties.
Always check that the transmission destination can
receive the streaming data.
The data may be sent to an unintended party if the
address or other settings are configured incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the
status of the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set
to a large size with a small bit rate.
To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size
setting.
ˎˎ If a network with bandwidth of less than 500 kbps is
used, Size and Bit Rate are set to the following.
‒‒ When Size is 480×270, Bit Rate is set to
0.3Mbps(Mono L), 0.3Mbps(Mono R),
0.2Mbps(Mono L), or 0.2Mbps(Mono R).
‒‒ When Size is 320×180, Bit Rate is set to
0.2Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R).
When this occurs, video is set to a frame rate of 10
fps, and audio is set to a sampling frequency of 48
kHz and a bit rate of 56 kbps Mono.
ˎˎ When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono
L), Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-1 or
Ch-3 & Ch-4 is set to Ch-3.
When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono R) or 0.2Mbps(Mono
R), Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-2 or
Ch-3 & Ch-4 is set to Ch-4.
Proxy Format Settings
You can set the format of the proxy file that is
recorded on the SD card of the camcorder.
Video
ˎˎXAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0
Long GOP)
ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings.
Audio
ˎˎAAC-LC compression
ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz
ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo
Item
Description
Proxy File
recording
>Bit Rate
Displays the video 9Mbps(VBR)/
6Mbps(VBR)/
bit rate for proxy
3Mbps(VBR)/
files.
1Mbps(VBR)/
0.5Mbps(VBR)
Setting
Proxy File
recording
>Audio
Channel
Select
Sets the audio
channel to record
to proxy data.
Ch-1 & Ch-2/
Ch-3 & Ch-4
[Notes]
ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be
exceeded at times.
ˎˎ 24 fps is not supported.
ˎˎ When HD Auto is selected for Size in the proxy format
settings, the proxy format is set according to the
setting of the recording format recorded on the SxS
memory card or the format of the clip to be played
back.
ˎˎ Proxy files recorded with Size set to HD Auto in the
proxy format settings may not be able to be played in
a browser or Content Browser Mobile. Insert SD cards
for recording proxy files directly into a computer to
play the files.
System Settings
Item
Description
Proxy File
recording
>Size
Sets the video size HD Auto(9Mbps)/
and bit rate for
HD Auto(6Mbps)/
proxy files.
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Setting
Proxy File
recording
>Frame
Rate
Displays the video 23.98fps/
25fps/
frame rate for
29.97fps/
proxy files.
50fps/
59.94fps
Use to load the Network Client Mode Settings
certificate.
75
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Network Client Mode Settings
ˎˎLoad Certification: Load button
Write the “CCM_certification.pem” CCM
certificate to be loaded to the root directory
of an SD card beforehand. For details about
CCM certificates, contact a Sony professional
sales representative.
Item
Description
Show Key
When set to On, entered
characters are displayed.
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP
address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder. Enabled only
when DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is
[Off].
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address
of the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Wireless LAN Station Settings
Use this screen to make settings for
connecting the camcorder to a wireless LAN.
Item
Description
Host Name
Name of the camcorder (can
be modified)
SSID
Displays the SSID selected in
[Access Point].
Key
Enter the password for the
access point.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server
for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS
server for the access point.
Enabled only when DNS Auto
is [Off].
Submit
Applies the wireless LAN
settings.
Connecting to an access point in station
mode without using WPS
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
access point mode (page 58).
2 Configure settings on the Station Settings
Station mode
screen.
Configure settings to match the settings
of the access point connection.
For details about access point settings, refer to the
instruction manual for the access point.
3 Tap [Submit].
The specified settings are applied.
4 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi
Mode in the setup menu.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi
Station], then press the knob.
This step connects the camcorder to the
access point in station mode. Proceed to
step 9 in “Connecting to an access point
using WPS” (page 59) to access the
camcorder from the device.
Wired LAN Settings
Use this screen to make settings for
connecting the camcorder to a wired LAN.
Checking wireless LAN settings
Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor
the wireless LAN status.
The displayed settings will vary depending on
the wireless LAN mode of the camcorder.
Item
Description
DHCP
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to [On], an IP
address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP
address manually, set to [Off].
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the
camcorder.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask of the
camcorder. Enabled when
DHCP is [Off].
Gateway
Enter the gateway for the
access point.
Enabled when DHCP is [Off].
Access point mode
76
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Description
DNS Auto
Obtains DNS address
automatically.
When set to On, the address
of the DNS server is obtained
automatically.
Primary DNS
Server
Enter the primary DNS server
of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Secondary DNS
Server
Enter the secondary DNS
server of the router.
Enabled when DNS Auto is
[Off].
Web/Cam
Remote
Enables/disables access to
the camcorder web menu
and Wi-Fi remote control.
When set to On, access is
permitted.
Submit
Sets the wired LAN settings.
[Note]
To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is
recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only
when the wired LAN network is not connected to the
Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that
the network connection is a secure network before use.
Checking wired LAN settings
Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the
wired LAN status.
Transfer (Upload) Settings
You can register and set servers for
transferring proxy files or original files
recorded on the camcorder.
Auto transfer ON/OFF
If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet
connection exists, proxy files are automatically
transferred to the default server specified on
the Upload Settings tab when recording ends.
“Sony Ci,” “NCM: RX Server,” “Server Settings1,”
“Server Settings2,” and “Server Settings3” are
registered as transfer destination servers. The
default value is “Sony Ci.”
“Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided
by Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci”
cloud service.
[Notes]
ˎˎ The service may not be available in some regions.
ˎˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci”
cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/
wireless.
For details about the Sony Ci privacy policy, visit the
following sites.
‒‒ Terms of service
https://www.sonymcs.com/terms/
‒‒ Usage policy
https://www.sonymcs.com/use/
‒‒ Privacy policy
https://www.sonymcs.com/privacy/
ˎˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is
specified in [Destination Directory]. If not specified,
a folder name with the current date is used. To
change the setting, see “To change registered server
settings” (page 77).
Use the following procedure to register with
“Sony Ci.”
For details about registering, visit www.
SonyMCS.com/wireless.
1 Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the
[Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit].
The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears.
2 Enter a user name in User, and a
password in Password.
The entered characters are visible when
Show Password is set to On.
Load Certification: Load button
Write the “Ci_certification.pem” Ci
certificate to be loaded to the root
directory of an SD card beforehand. For
details about Ci certificates, contact a
Sony professional sales representative.
3 Tap [Link].
To register a destination server
You can select “Server Settings1,” “Server
Settings2,” or “Server Settings3” (registered in
Upload Server) as the destination server.
Select the server settings, tap Edit, and
configure the server information on the
displayed screen (below).
After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply
the settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the
settings.
Item
Description
Default Server
Set to [On] to set the default
file destination server.
(Displayed at the top of the
server list for file transfers.)
Display Name
Enter the name of the
server to display in the list.
Service
Displays the type of server.
FTP: FTP server
Host Name
Enter the address of the
server.
A completion message appears after a
short while.
[Link] associates the user with the
camcorder. An Internet connection is
required to execute [Link].
4 Tap [OK].
After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink]
appears on the Settings screen. Tapping
[Unlink] releases the user account to
enable other user accounts to link with
the camcorder.
[Note]
If a port number other than
the default number of 21 is
used, append a colon and the
port number at the end of the
address (for example, “:123”).
User
Enter the user name.
Password
Enter the password.
Show Password
When set to On, entered
characters are displayed.
PASV Mode
Enable/disable PASV mode.
77
5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu
Item
Description
Destination
Directory
Specify the destination
directory.
[Note]
If an invalid character is entered
in the directory name, the
directory is not created and
files are transferred to the top
level of the default transfer
destination directory.
Using Secure
Protocol
Set whether to use secure
FTP.
Load Certification
Load an intermediate CA
certificate.
Displayed when Using
Secure Protocol is set to On.
Monitoring File Transfers (Job List)
You can monitor file transfer status, manage
files in the transfer file list, and start/stop file
transfers.
The camcorder supports the FTP resume
function (for continuing file transfer if transfer
stops).
[Note]
Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of
FTPS is recommended.
To change registered server settings
Select the server whose settings you want to
change on the Upload Settings screen, then
tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed
configuration screen.
For details about items, see “To register a
destination server”.
Symptom
Item
Description
Total
Progress status of the
transfer of all files
Status
Progress status of the file
being transferred
Remain time
Predicted remaining transfer
time
Transfer data rate
Transfer rate
To stop/restart file transfer or delete a
file from the transfer list
1 Select a file.
2 Tap
on the top right of the screen.
Select a menu item.
ˎˎAbort selected: Stop file transfer.
ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the file from the
transfer list.
ˎˎStart selected: Start file transfer.
ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list.
ˎˎClear completed: Delete all files that
have been transferred from the list.
Solution
“Invalid certification The certificate being
file.” appears.
loaded is invalid.
Check the certificate.
“Certification file
not found.”
appears.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Communication using FTP
is not encrypted. The use of
FTPS is recommended.
ˎˎ An intermediate CA certificate
containing a root certificate is
required.
ˎˎ The certificate to be loaded
must be in PEM format, and
should be written to the root
directory of the SD card with
“certification.pem” file name.
Loading Certificates
Troubleshooting
Check that the file name
of the certificate file is
correct.
78
5. Network Configuration
Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations
Network Functions and Network Connection Settings
Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions
The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance
>Network >Wi-Fi Mode, Modem, and Wired LAN settings) are shown below.
To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On.
The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions.
Wireless LAN connection
Wired LAN
connection
Operation
Network function
Maintenance >Network >Wireless
Network in the setup menu
Maintenance
Maintenance >Network
>Network >Modem >Wired LAN
None
Disabled
Network function stopped
USB wireless LAN module
Disabled
USB wireless LAN module operating
Wi-Fi Access
Point
Wi-Fi
Station
Off
On
3G/4G/LTE USB modem
Disabled
3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating
Proxy recording 1)
(page 51)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
Enabled
Wired LAN operating
USB wireless LAN module
Enabled
Proxy playback
(page 73)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN
operating 1)
File transfer
(page 65)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Streaming
transmission
(page 69)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Monitoring
(page 73)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
Network client
mode
(page 70)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Camcorder remote
control
(page 71)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
No
No
No
Yes 2)
No
2)
Off
2)
Enable
2)
Disable
No
1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote
control operation.
[Note]
1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode> Setting in the setup menu is set to On.
2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions.
Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied
with the CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder.
79
6. Clip Operations
Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Thumbnail Screen
Cursor
(yellow)
1
2
3
4
5
6
78
OK S Sub
9
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the
THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode.
Thumbnail screens display lists of the index
pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards
as thumbnails.
You can select any clip (page 80) on the
thumbnail screen and start playback of that
clip (page 80).
You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the
thumbnail screen to filter clips according to
the flags. You can also switch to the Essence
Mark thumbnail screen from the thumbnail
screen and add essence marks (for example,
shot marks) to any frame in the clip.
10
11
To hide the thumbnail screen, press the
THUMBNAIL button.
1. Thumbnail (index picture)
When a clip is recorded, its first frame is
automatically displayed as the index picture.
You can change the index picture to any frame
(page 84).
2. Selected media icon/media status
A
mark is displayed if the media is
protected.
If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the
camcorder, you can switch between them
using the SLOT SELECT button.
12
13
3. Clip number / total number of clips
7. Clip select checkbox
4. Battery / Voltage status
Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a
clip (thumbnail).
5. Playback disabled indicator
6. Clip status
Displays the clips status using an icon.
8. Thumbnail information
Displays thumbnail information. The displayed
information varies according to the Customize
View setting (page 85).
Icon
Meaning
S, OK, NG, KP
icons
Essence mark or clip flag
attached to a clip
9. Clip name / title
Sub icon
Subclip recording (1-slot Simul
Rec)
10. Recording video format
Lock icon
Clip is locked (protected)
Displays the name or title of the selected clip.
80
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
11. Special recording information
Displays the recording mode if the clip was
recorded using a special recording mode (Slow
& Quick Motion).
For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording
frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed
on the right.
12. Clip duration
13. Creation date
Selecting Clips
To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the
following to move the yellow cursor to the
thumbnail that you want to select.
ˎˎPress the , , ,  buttons.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob.
ˎˎPress the PREV or NEXT button.
Selecting the First Thumbnail
Press and hold the F REV button, and press the
PREV button.
Selecting the Last Thumbnail
Playing Clips Sequentially Starting
from the Selected Clip
1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you
want to play first.
Playing at High Speed
Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F
REV button (page 7).
To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/
PAUSE button.
2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
Playback begins from the start of the
selected clip.
It plays all clips sequentially starting from the
selected clip.
When playback of the last clip finishes, the
camcorder switches to the camera image or
external input state.
Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the
thumbnail screen.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the
clips on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a
mixture of different recording formats.
ˎˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 79)
displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played.
The corresponding clips are skipped and sequential
playback continues.
ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still
image display at the boundary between clips. During
this time, the play controls and the THUMBNAIL
button cannot be operated.
ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and
begin playback, there may be momentary picture
breakup at the start of the clip. To view the start of
the clip without breakup, put the camcorder into
playback mode, pause, use the PREV button to return
to the start of the clip, and start play again.
Press and hold the F FWD button, and press
the NEXT button.
Returning to the Start of the
Current Clip
Press the PREV button.
ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of
the current clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the
current clip and pauses playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the
start of the current clip and displays a still
image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves
to the previous clip.
Playing from the Start of the First
Clip
Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV
buttons. This jumps to the start of the first clip
on the SxS memory card.
Jumping to the Start of the Next
Clip
Press the NEXT button.
ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of
the next clip and starts playback.
ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of
the next clip and pauses playback. During
playback of the last clip, this jumps to the
end of the clip and pauses playback.
ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the
start of the next clip and displays a still
image.
ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves
to the next clip.
Jumping to the Last Clip
Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT
buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the
last clip recorded on the SxS memory card.
Adding a Shot Mark during
Playback
You can add shot marks to clips during playback
by using the same method used during
recording (page 46).
[Note]
Pausing Playback
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.
The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play
is paused.
Press the button again to return to play mode.
Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory
card is write protected.
81
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
Stopping Playback
Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and
the camcorder enters E-E mode.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops
and the thumbnail screen (page 79)
appears in the viewfinder.
Play also stops if you eject the memory card.
In this case, the camera picture appears in the
viewfinder.
Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations
The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete
clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags
and essence marks to frames in a clip, and
other tasks.
1 Press the THUMBNAIL button.
The thumbnail screen appears.
To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU
button again.
To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the
following.
ˎˎTurn the MENU knob to select an item or
sub-item, then press the knob.
ˎˎPress the arrow buttons (, , , ) to
select an item or sub-item, then press the
SET button.
A selection list or a clip properties screen
appears (page 83) according to the selected
item or sub-item.
To return to the previous screen, push the
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to
the ESCAPE position.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not
possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add
and delete clip flags marks and shot marks.
ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the
state when the menu was displayed.
For details about the thumbnail screen
structure, see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 85).
3 Turn the MENU knob to select
[Thumbnail], then press the knob.
You can also press the  or  button to
select [Thumbnail], and press the SET
button.
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip
>Select Clip in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to
protect, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected
clip.
4 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and
press the SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
message.
Protecting Clips
You can protect a specified clip or all clips to
protect the clips from being deleted.
is added to the thumbnails of protected
clips.
Clips can be protected on the thumbnail
screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen
(page 83).
[Notes]
ˎˎ This function is not available when the file system is
set to FAT.
ˎˎ For clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode, subclips
are also protected.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
Unlocking all clips
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip
>Unlock All Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All clips are unlocked, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
then press the knob.
The clip is protected, and a completion
message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or
press the MENU button.
The menu screen appears.
Protecting a specific clip
Protecting all clips
1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock
All Clips in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All clips are protected, and a completion
message appears.
Copying Clips
You can copy clips to another SxS memory
card.
Clips are copied to destination SxS memory
cards using the same names as the original
clips.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If a clip with the same name already exists at the copy
destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in
parentheses is added to the original name.
The number in parentheses is the smallest number
that does not exist at the copy destination.
Example:
ABCD0002ABCD0002(1)
ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2)
ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4)
ˎˎ If the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already exist
at the copy destination, because a clip has been
copied more than 1000 times, it is not possible to
copy any more clips under that name.
82
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
ˎˎ A message appears if there is not enough free space
on the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange
the card for one with more free space.
ˎˎ When multiple clips are recorded on the source SxS
memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips
even when the source and destination memory cards
have the same capacity, depending on the memory
characteristics and usage of the memory cards.
ˎˎ When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are
copied, both the main clip and subclips are copied.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
Copying a specific clip
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All clips are copied, and a completion
message appears.
message.
in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to
copy, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected
clip.
4 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and
press the SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
The clip is copied, and a completion
message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
Copying all clips
You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time to another SxS
memory card.
1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in
the setup menu.
The clip is deleted, and a completion
message appears.
6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
The clips below the deleted clip on the
thumbnail screen move up one position.
Deleting all clips
You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS
memory card at the same time.
[Notes]
Deleting Clips
You can delete clips from SxS memory
cards. Clips can be deleted on the thumbnail
screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen
(page 83).
[Note]
When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are deleted,
both the main clip and subclips are deleted.
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip
in the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
The clip selection screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to
delete, then press the knob.
A check mark is attached to the selected
clip.
4 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and
press the SET button.
A confirmation screen appears.
5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
ˎˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored.
ˎˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is
disabled.
1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in
the setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All clips are deleted, and a completion
message appears.
4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the
message.
Transferring Clips
Clips (original files) recorded on SxS memory
cards and proxy files recorded on SD cards
can be uploaded to a server using Thumbnail
>Transfer Clip and Transfer Clip(Proxy),
respectively, in the setup menu.
For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip procedure,
see “Transferring Original Files using the
Thumbnail Screen” (page 67).
For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy)
procedure, see “Transferring Proxy Files using
the Thumbnail Screen” (page 65).
[Note]
When clips created in 1-slot Simul Rec mode are
transferred using Thumbnail >Transfer Clip, only the
main clip is transferred.
83
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip to which
Displaying Clip Properties
The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip
Properties in the setup menu.
1
4
OK S Sub
2
5
6
7
3
1. Current clip image
Displays the index picture and status of the
selected clip.
2. Timecode display
TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image
Start: Timecode of the recording start point
End: Timecode of the recording end point
Duration: Duration between start and end
points
To hide the clip properties screen, do one of
the following.
Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to
the Thumbnail menu screen.
Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the
camcorder to E-E mode and displays the
camera picture.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback
of the selected clip.
3. Creation date and modified date
4. Clip name
5. Recording format
Video Codec: Video codec
Size: Picture size
FPS: Frame rate
Audio Codec: Audio codec
Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of
bits for audio recording
6. Special recording information
7. Recording device name
you want to add the clip flag, then select
Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag,
then press the knob.
Setting
Added clip flag
Add OK
OK
Add NG
NG
Add KEEP
KP
The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of
the selected clip.
You can also use an assignable switch
assigned with the clip flag function to add clip
flags (page 120).
Deleting a Clip Flag
1 Select the thumbnail for the clip from
which you want to delete a clip flag, then
select Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete
Clip Flag in the setup menu.
The clip flag is deleted.
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set
to FAT.
used to filter clips, then press the knob.
Setting
Filter clip flag
OK
OK
NG
NG
KEEP
KP
None
(Clips are not filtered)
The clip screen appears showing the clips
filtered by the selected clip flag. This
screen is referred to as the filtered clip
screen.
To cancel filtering, do one of the following.
ˎˎPress the RESET/RETURN button.
ˎˎSelect Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >All in
the setup menu.
Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in
Clips
You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot
marks, recording start marks) to any frame in
a clip. You add/delete essence marks on the
essence mark thumbnail screen.
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set
to FAT.
Adding Clip Flags to Clips
You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks)
to clips to filter the display of clips based on
the clip flags. You can perform this operation
on the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip
thumbnail screen (page 83).
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag
Filtering the Clips Displayed using
the Filtered Clip Screen
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set
to FAT.
1 Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup
menu.
Adding a shot mark
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View >
Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and
then press the knob.
84
6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame to
which you want to add the essence mark
on the essence mark thumbnail screen,
then select Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in
the setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is added to the selected
frame.
Filtering Clips (Frames) using the
Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen
Changing the Index Picture of a
Clip
The essence mark thumbnail screen displays
only those frames in a clip where an essence
mark has been recorded in thumbnail view.
Display the thumbnail screen, then either
press the ESSENCE MARK button (page 9)
or use the following procedure to display the
essence mark thumbnail screen.
You can set the frame selected on the essence
mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for
the clip.
Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to
set as the index picture for the clip, then select
Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup
menu.
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set
to FAT.
1 Select Thumbnail >Thumbnail View
Deleting a shot mark
1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View >
Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup
menu.
2 Select the type of shot mark to delete.
3 Select the thumbnail for the frame from
which you want to delete a shot mark on
the essence mark thumbnail screen, then
select Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the
setup menu.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the
following, then press the knob.
Setting
Operation
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2
The shot mark is deleted from the
selected frame.
>Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup
menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an essence
mark used to filter frames, then press the
knob.
Setting
Description
All
All frames with added
essence marks
Rec Start
Frames with a recording
start mark and the first
frame of clips that do not
have a recording start mark
Shot Mark0
to Shot
Mark9
Frames with each shot mark
The essence mark thumbnail screen
appears filtered by the selected essence
mark.
If a clip is recorded using planning metadata
that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot
mark 9, the selection options in the list are
displayed by the defined names.
85
6. Clip Operations
Thumbnail Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Display Clip Properties
–
Displays clip properties (page 83).
Set Index Picture
–
Sets/changes the index picture of a clip
(page 84).
Thumbnail View
Changes the thumbnail
screen displayed.
Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen
Essence Mark Thumbnail
with clips filtered by essence mark
All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/
(page 84).
Shot Mark2/Shot Mark3/
Shot Mark4/Shot Mark5/
Shot Mark6/Shot Mark7/Shot
Mark8/Shot Mark9/Shot
Mark0
Set Shot Mark
Adds/deletes shot
marks.
Set Clip Flag
Adds/deletes clip flags.
Lock/Unlock Clip
Protects/unlocks a clip.
Clip Thumbnail
Displays the thumbnail screen (clip
thumbnail screen) (page 79).
Add Shot Mark1
Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 83).
Delete Shot Mark1
Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 84).
Add Shot Mark2
Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 83).
Delete Shot Mark2
Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 84).
Add OK
Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 83).
Add NG
Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 83).
Add KEEP
Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 83).
Delete Clip Flag
Deletes a clip flag (page 83).
Select Clip
Selects the clip to protect (page 81).
Lock All Clips
Protects all clips on the media (page 81).
Unlock All Clips
Unlocks all clips on the media (page 81).
Copy Clip
Copies clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to copy (page 82).
All Clips
Copies all clips on the media (page 82).
Copy Sub Clip
Copies subclips to other
media as main clips.
All Clips
Selects all the subclips to copy (page 50).
Delete Clip
Deletes clips.
Select Clip
Selects the clip to delete (page 82).
All Clips
Deletes all clips on the media (page 82).
Transfer Clip
Select Clip
Registers original files to
transfer in the job list.
All Clips
Selects the original file to transfer
(page 67).
Selects all the original files in media to
transfer (page 67).
Item
Sub-item setting
Description
Transfer Clip(Proxy)
Registers proxy files to
transfer in the job list.
Select Clip
Selects the proxy file to transfer
corresponding to the selected original file
(page 65).
All Clips
Selects all the proxy files in media to transfer
corresponding to the original files
(page 66).
OK
Filters the display of clips by OK flags
(page 83).
NG
Filters the display of clips by NG flags
(page 83).
KEEP
Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags
(page 83).
None
Thumbnail Caption
Date Time/Time Code/
Duration/Sequential
Number
Clips are not filtered (page 83).
Selects the information displayed beneath
clip thumbnails.
Date Time: Displays the date and time.
Time Code: Displays the timecode.
Duration: Displays the duration of the clip.
Sequential Number: Displays a sequential
number for each clip.
Filter Clips
Filters the display of
clips by clip flag.
Customize View
86
7. Menu Display and Settings
Setup Menu Organization
On this camcorder, settings for shooting and
playback are made in the setup menu, which
appears in the viewfinder.
The setup menu can also be displayed on an
external video monitor (page 134).
Menu Structure
User menu
Menu used to arrange items from the
setup menu in any chosen order
(page 90).
Operation menu
Menu used to make settings related to
shooting (excluding settings related to
picture quality).
Paint menu
Menu used to make settings related to
picture quality.
Thumbnail menu
Menu used to make settings related to
clip thumbnails (page 85).
[Note]
The Thumbnail menu can be used only when
a thumbnail screen (page 79) is displayed.
It is disabled when the thumbnail screen is not
displayed.
Maintenance menu
Menu used to make settings related to
camcorder maintenance and system
management.
File menu
Menu used to make perform operations
on files.
Menu Items
Item
Description
Update Media
100
Operation menu
Update media
management
information
GPS
Location information
(GPS) settings
100
Page
Item
Description
System settings
93
Planning
Metadata
Planning metadata
settings
100
Format
Base Setting
Dynamic range mode
settings
93
USB
Copy to USB media
settings
100
Page
HDR Setting
HDR settings
93
Format Media
Media format settings
94
Input/Output
Input/output signal
settings
94
Super Impose
Superimposition
settings
94
LCD
LCD monitor settings
94
Rec Function
Special recording
mode settings
XAVC Proxy
Rec Mode
Paint menu
Item
Description
Switch Status
Correction functions
and test signal on/off
settings
102
95
HDR Paint
Setting
HDR settings
102
Proxy data settings
95
White
Color temperature
settings
102
Assignable
Switch
Assign functions to
assignable switches
96
Black
Black level settings
102
VF Setting
Viewfinder settings
96
Flare
Flare correction
settings
102
Marker
Marker settings
96
Gamma(HDR)
HDR gamma settings
103
Gain Switch
Gain value settings
97
Gamma
103
Auto Iris
Auto iris settings
97
Gamma correction
settings
Zebra
Zebra pattern
settings
97
Black Gamma
Black gamma
correction settings
103
Knee
Knee correction
settings
104
White Clip
White clip settings
104
Detail(QFHD)
Detail settings
104
Detail(HD)
Detail settings
104
Aperture
Aperture correction
settings
105
Skin Detail
Skin detail correction
settings
105
Matrix
Matrix correction
settings
105
Display On/Off Viewfinder display
item settings
97
“!” LED
Viewfinder “!”
settings
98
White Setting
White balance
settings
99
Offset White
Offset white settings
99
Shutter
Shutter settings
99
Slow Shutter
Slow shutter settings
99
Time Zone
Time settings
100
Clip
Clip settings
100
Page
87
7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization
Item
Description
Page
Item
Description
Page
Multi Matrix
Multi matrix
correction settings
105
APR
APR settings
112
V modulation
shading correction
settings
106
Connection settings
using the network
setup assist tool
112
V Modulation
Setup for
Mobile App
Low key saturation
correction settings
106
Access
Authentication
Access authentication
settings
112
Low Key
Saturation
Network
Saturation correction
settings
106
Network connection
settings
113
Saturation
Mode
Noise suppression
settings
106
Network Client Network client mode
Mode
settings
114
Noise
Suppression
115
Maintenance menu
Item
Description
Page
White Shading White shading
correction settings
107
Black Shading
Black shading
correction settings
107
Battery
Battery settings
107
DC Voltage
Alarm
External DC source
voltage alarm
settings
107
File Transfer
Wi-Fi transfer settings
Streaming
Streaming settings
115
Clock Set
Internal clock settings
116
Language
Display language
settings
116
Hours Meter
Digital time counter
settings
116
Network Reset Network reset
116
Fan Control
Fan control settings
116
VF Display
Setting
Viewfinder display
settings
116
Version
Version settings
116
Audio
Audio settings
107
WRR Setting
Wireless tuner
settings
109
File menu
Time Code
Timecode settings
110
Item
Description
110
User File
User file settings
118
All File
ALL file settings
118
Scene File
Scene file settings
118
Reference file
settings
118
Essence Mark
Essence mark
settings
Camera Config Camcorder operation
settings
110
Preset White
111
Reference File
Preset white settings
Page
White Filter
Filter settings
111
Lens File
Lens file settings
119
DCC Adjust
DCC settings
112
User Gamma
Gamma file settings
119
Flicker Reduce
Flicker correction
settings
112
Genlock
Genlock settings
112
Auto Shading
Auto black shading
correction settings
112
88
7. Menu Display and Settings
Basic Setup Menu Operations
Displaying the Setup Menu
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press
the MENU button.
The camcorder enters menu mode and the
menu list appears on the screen.
ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays
a maximum of seven lines. You can
scroll through menus with more than
seven lines by moving the cursor up
and down.
The following example shows the cursor
positioned at the Operation menu
4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the subitem that you want to set, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the
SET button.
The settings of the selected sub-item
appear, and the cursor moves to the
currently selected value.
Entering Text
When you select an item, such as a file name,
which requires character entry, the character
entry screen appears.
1
Menu list
Displayed when there are
further menu items below.
Menu item selection area
[Note]
The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder
is in focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification
mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the
Focus Mag function has been assigned.
Making Menu Settings
Menu item selection area
ˎˎIf the selected item has subitems, they appear on the right.
ˎˎIf there are no sub-items, the
current setting appears on the
right.
ˎˎSelect [Back] to return to the
previous level.
3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the menu
item that you want to set, and then
confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the
SET button.
The sub-items area appears to the right of
the menu item selection area, and the
cursor moves to the first sub-item.
1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to move the cursor to the desired
menu.
A list of selectable menu items appears in
the menu item selection area to the right
of the menu list.
2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button.
The menu item selection screen appears.
You can also display the menu item
selection screen by pressing the 
button.
Settings area
ˎˎDisplays sub-items and their current
settings
ˎˎTo return to the previous level, select
[Back], press the  button, or push
the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch down to the ESCAPE position.
Settings area
ˎˎThe settings area displays a maximum
of nine lines. You can scroll through
menus with more than nine sub-items
by moving the cursor up and down.
ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings
range (for example, –99 to +99), the
settings area is not displayed. The
current setting is highlighted to indicate
that the value can be changed.
5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the  or 
button, to select the value to set, and
then confirm by pressing the MENU knob
or the SET button.
The setting is changed, and the display is
updated to show the new setting.
If you select [Execute] for an executable
item, the corresponding function is
executed.
If an item requires confirmation before
execution, selecting the item in step 3 hides
the menu and a confirmation message
appears. Follow the instructions in the
message to execute or cancel the operation.
2
3
1 Press the MENU knob to select the type of
character to enter, then press the MENU
knob or SET button.
ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters
abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
123: Numeric characters
!#$: Special characters
2 Select a character from the selected
character type, then press the knob.
The cursor moves to the next field.
Space: Enters a space character at the
cursor position.
/: Moves the position of the cursor.
BS: Deletes the character on the left of
the cursor (backspace).
3 When finished, select [Done] and press
the dial.
The character string is confirmed and the
character entry screen disappears.
89
7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations
Canceling Changes to Settings
1 Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE
switch down to the ESCAPE position.
Exiting the Menu
1 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or
press the MENU button.
The normal camera picture reappears.
Locking/Unlocking the Menu
You can lock the setup menu so that only the
User menu is displayed.
4 Enter an arbitrary passcode number.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. The
default value is 0000.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob
to move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move
the cursor to [Set].
5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
A confirmation message appears.
Subsequently, only the User menu is
displayed.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the menu is locked without registering the following
setup menu items in the User menu, assigning the
menu function to an assignable switch is not possible.
ˎˎ If some of the following setup menu items are
assigned to an assignable switch when the menu
is locked, the setting for the functions assigned to
assignable switches are forcibly set to Off when the
menu is locked.
Setup menu
Functions
assignable to
assignable
switches
Operation >Rec Function
>Picture Cache Rec
Picture Cache Rec
Operation >Rec Function
>Clip Continuous Rec
Clip Continuous
Rec
Operation >Rec Function
>Slow & Quick Motion
Slow & Quick
Motion
Locking the menu
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press
the MENU ON/OFF switch down to display
the setup menu.
2 Display Maintenance >Camera Config
>User Menu with Lock in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and
press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera
Config >User Menu Only changes to User Menu
with Lock.
ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down
without pressing the MENU knob or you press
the MENU button to display the menu, Camera
Config >User Menu with Lock is not displayed.
3 Select “On,” then press the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display switches to
the passcode number input screen.
Operation >Display On/Off Video Signal
>Video Signal Monitor
Monitor
Operation >Display On/Off Lens Info
>Lens Info
Operation >Auto Iris
>Mode
Spotlight
Operation >Marker
>Setting
Marker
Maintenance >Audio
>Front MIC Select
Front MIC
Backlight
Setup menu
Functions
assignable to
assignable
switches
Maintenance >Network
Client Mode >Setting
Network Client
Mode
Maintenance >File Transfer
>Auto Upload(Proxy)
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Unlocking the menu
1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press
the MENU ON/OFF switch down to display
the setup menu.
2 Display User >Camera Config >User Menu
with Lock in the setup menu.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and
press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera
Config >User Menu Only changes to User Menu
with Lock.
ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down
without pressing the MENU knob or you press
the MENU button to display the menu, Camera
Config >User Menu with Lock is not displayed.
3 Select “Off,” then press the MENU knob.
The viewfinder screen display switches to
the passcode number input screen.
4 Enter the passcode number used to lock
the menu.
The valid input range is 0000 to 9999.
Enter a number and press the MENU knob
to move the cursor to the next digit.
When all digits have been entered, move
the cursor to [Set].
5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob.
The entry is applied.
If the entered passcode number matches
the passcode number used to lock the
menu, a confirmation message appears
and the display of all menus is enabled.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the entered passcode number does not match
the passcode number used to lock the menu,
the menu is not unlocked.
ˎˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of
the passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten.
If you do forget the passcode number, contact
your Sony service representative.
90
7. Menu Display and Settings
Editing the User Menu
You can edit the User menu, such as adding
items, deleting items, and rearranging items,
to make the User menu more useful using Edit
User Menu.
You can select items in the Operation menu,
Paint menu, Maintenance menu, and some
items in the File menu, and add them to the
User menu.
Up to 20 items can be registered in the User
menu. There are six items registered in the
User menu by factory default, one of which
must always be present, allowing you to add
up to 19 new items.
Adding Items and Sub-Items
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User
Menu >Add Item, then press the knob.
The items that can be added are
displayed.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
edit, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in
the edit function list, then press the knob.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub
Item in the edit function list, then press
the knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item,
The item is deleted.
then press the knob.
A screen for selecting sub-items to add
appears.
Moving Items
[Note]
Editing is unavailable when the menu is locked.
The Edit Sub Item screen appears.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
Displaying the Edit User Menu
Screen
You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu
screen.
1 Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit
User Menu, then press the knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
move, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item,
then press the knob.
Place a check mark in the All checkbox to
add all sub-items.
Place a check mark in the individual
checkboxes to specify which sub-items to
add.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then
press the knob.
The item/sub-item(s) are added.
All sub-items are checked when the
screen is first opened (function to display
all sub-items).
Remove the check marks for the subitems you do not want to display in the
User menu.
The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice.
Also, the name of the item or sub-item cannot be
changed.
Editing Sub-Items
You can specify the sub-items to display.
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
edit function list, then press the knob.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then
press the knob.
Editing is completed.
[Note]
The Edit User Menu screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the
The item to move is highlighted, and a
triangle mark and line indicate the
destination position.
Deleting Items
1 Display the Edit User Menu screen.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to
edit, then press the knob.
The edit function list appears.
Triangle mark and line
indicating move destination
91
7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu
4 Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle
and line to the desired destination, then
press the knob.
The item is moved.
Restoring the User Menu to
Factory Default State
1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User
Menu >Customize Reset, then press the
knob.
The Customize Reset screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset],
then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
The User menu is restored to the factory
default state.
92
7. Menu Display and Settings
User Menu (Factory Default Configuration)
The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state.
ˎˎFormat Media (page 94)
ˎˎRec Function (page 95)
ˎˎInput/Output (page 94)
ˎˎClip (page 100)
ˎˎAssignable Switch1) (page 96)
ˎˎCamera Config2) (page 110)
1) Excluding sub-item 0
2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item
For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 90).
93
7. Menu Display and Settings
Operation Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Setting
Description
Frequency
59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98
Selects the system frequency (execute by
selecting Execute).
Operation >Format
Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio.
Item
Setting
Description
Rec Format
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is UDF and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
SP 1440×1080i
When the file system is FAT and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is FAT and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
[Note]
Switching the system frequency also switches
the Rec Format setting to the value configured
previously at that frequency.
File System
exFAT/UDF/FAT
Switches the file system (execute by selecting
Execute).
Rec Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the recording format (execute by
selecting Execute).
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
XAVC-L200 2160P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
When the file system is exFAT and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080P
When the file system is exFAT and the system
frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98.
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
When the file system is UDF and the system
frequency is 59.94 or 50.
Operation >Base Setting
Sets the dynamic range for imaging.
Item
Setting
Description
Shooting Mode
SDR/HDR
SDR: Sets conventional standard dynamic
range mode.
HDR: Sets High Dynamic Range mode.
High Sensitivity
Mode
Off/On
On: Increases sensitivity by approximately 4
dB, in comparison with normal mode.
Operation >HDR Setting
Sets the 4K(QFHD) and HD recording and output system used during HDR operation. The color
space is ITU-R BT.2020 for HDR(HLG). The color space can be set to ITU-R BT.2020 or
S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine for HDR(S-Log3).
Item
Setting
Description
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out
HDR Setting
HDR(HLG)/HDR(S-Log3)
HDR(HLG): Sets HLG for 4K (QFHD) recording
and output.
HDR(S-Log3): Sets S-Log3 for 4K (QFHD)
recording and output.
HD Rec/Out
HDR(HLG)/HDR(S-Log3)/SDR
Enabled when 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to
HDR(HLG) or HDR(S-Log3).
HDR(HLG): Sets HLG for HD recording and
output.
HDR(S-Log3): Sets HDR(S-Log3) for HD
recording and output.
SDR: Sets SDR for HD recording and output.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to HDR(S-Log3),
HDR(HLG) cannot be selected.
ˎˎ When 4K(QFHD) Rec/Out is set to HDR(HLG),
HDR(S-Log3) cannot be selected.
SDR Gain
0dB to –6dB to –15dB
Adjusts the SDR gain relative to the HDR value
when HD Rec/Out is set to SDR.
94
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >HDR Setting
Sets the 4K(QFHD) and HD recording and output system used during HDR operation. The color
space is ITU-R BT.2020 for HDR(HLG). The color space can be set to ITU-R BT.2020 or
S-Gamut3/S-Gamut3.Cine for HDR(S-Log3).
Item
Setting
Description
4K(QFHD) Color
Space
BT.2020/
S-Gamut3(3200K)/
S-Gamut3(4300K)/
S-Gamut3(5500K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)/
BT.709
Sets the 4K output color space.
S-Gamut3: Wide color space that covers
Sony’s ITU-R BT.2020.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Color space adjustable for
digital cinema color space (DCI-P3).
The recommended settings based on the
white balance color temperature are as
follows.
3700K or lower: S-Gamut3(3200K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)
3700K to 4700K: S-Gamut3(4300K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)
4700K or higher: S-Gamut3(5500K) or
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)
Operation >Input/Output
Sets input/output signals.
Item
Setting
Description
Output Format
Settings vary according to the
system frequency setting.
Selects the output format (execute by
selecting Execute).
Settings vary according to the recording
format setting (page 32).
Source Select
Camera/External
Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN
connector input signal for the video input
source.
SDI Out1 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1
connector on/off.
SDI Out2 Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2
connector on/off.
HDMI Output
On/Off
Turns the output signal from the HDMI
connector on/off.
SDI Out/HDMI Super
Off/On
Turns character information (superimposed)
from the SDI OUT 1/2 and HDMI connectors
on/off. However, when the signal format is
HD, character information output from the SDI
OUT1 connector is turned off regardless of this
setting.
[Note]
When S-Gamut3 or S-Gamut3.Cine is used, select
a setting according to the color temperature of the
shooting environment.
HD Color Space
BT.2020/
S-Gamut3(3200K)/
S-Gamut3(4300K)/
S-Gamut3(5500K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(3200K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(4300K)/
S-Gamut3.Cine(5500K)/
BT.709
HD output color space (display only).
S-Gamut3: Wide color space that covers
Sony’s ITU-R BT.2020.
S-Gamut3.Cine: Color space adjustable for
digital cinema color space (DCI-P3).
Operation >Super Impose
Sets character information/markers to be superimposed.
Item
Setting
Description
When Input/Output >SDI Out/HDMI Super is
set to On, this turns superimposition of
character information on the output from the
SDI OUT connectors on/off.
Super(VF Display)
On/Off
Super(Menu)
On/Off
Super(Marker)
On/Off
Operation >Format Media
Formats the media.
When Input/Output >SDI Out/HDMI Super is
set to On, this turns superimposition of
markers on the output from the SDI OUT
connectors on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A
(execute by selecting Execute).
Operation >LCD
Sets the LCD monitor.
Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B
(execute by selecting Execute).
Item
Setting
Description
LCD Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor.
LCD Marker&Zebra
On/Off
Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on
the LCD monitor on/off.
SD Card(Utility)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card
slot (execute by selecting Execute).
SD Card(Proxy)
Execute/Cancel
Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card
slot (execute by selecting Execute).
95
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Operation >Rec Function
Sets the special recording mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Slow & Quick Motion
On/Off
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set
to On, the settings for other special recording
modes are set to Off.)
Number of Frames
The available settings vary
depending on the Format
>Frequency setting.
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec
take.
Frame Rate
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the
frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting.
2frames/6frames/12frames
When the recording format frame rate is 50P
or 59.94P.
72, 75, 90, 96, 100, 120
When the file system is exFAT, and the
recording format is XAVC Intra (1920×1080) or
XAVC Long (1920×1080).
1frame/3frames/6frames/
9frames
When the recording format frame rate is
23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i.
Interval Time
1 to 60
When the file system is exFAT, and the
recording format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long.
When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the
interval for Interval Rec shooting.
1 to 50
When the file system is UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1280×720), 50P/25P.
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50 (sec)
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/
20/30/40/50/ (min)
1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour)
Pre-Lighting
Off/2sec/5sec/10sec
1 to 30
When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P.
Sets the number of seconds that the video
light is turned on prior to the start of Interval
Rec shooting. To not turn the video light on,
select Off.
1 to 25
When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the
recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M
(1920×1080), 25P.
Simul Rec
On/Off
Turns 2-slot simultaneous recording to slots A
and B on/off.
4K & HD (Sub) Rec
On/Off
Turns 1-slot simultaneous recording on/off.
Clip Continuous Rec
On/Off
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
(When set to On, the settings for other special
recording modes are set to Off.)
HD (Sub) Rec Format
Sets the HD (Sub) recording format for 1-slot
Simul Rec mode.
Picture Cache Rec
On/Off
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. (When
set to On, the settings for other special
recording modes, excluding some functions,
are set to Off.)
When the system frequency is
59.94 or 50:
XAVC-L50 1920×1080P/HD422
50 1080i
Cache Rec Time
Interval Rec
Settings vary according to the
recording format setting.
On/Off
When the system frequency is
29.97, 25, or 23.98:
XAVC-L50 1920×1080P/HD422
50 1080P
Sets the time for accumulation of images in
picture cache memory (picture cache
recording time).
HD (Sub) Playback
Mode
For details, see “Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings”
(page 162) in the Appendix.
Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
Sets proxy recording.
Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to
On, the settings for other special recording
modes are set to Off.)
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns proxy recording on/off.
On/Off
Turns the playback function for subclips
recorded in 1-slot Simul Rec mode on/off.
96
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
Sets proxy recording.
Operation >Marker
Sets the marker display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Size
HD Auto(9Mbps)/
HD Auto(6Mbps)/
1280×720(9Mbps)/
1280×720(6Mbps)/
640×360(3Mbps)/
480×270(1Mbps)/
480×270(0.5Mbps)
Selects the size of the proxy recording format.
Setting
On/Off
Frame Rate
23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/
50fps/59.94fps
Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording
format.
Bit Rate
9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/
1Mbps/0.5Mbps
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Description
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
[Note]
When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch,
this setting is disabled.
Color
White/Yellow/Cyan/Green/
Magenta/Red/Blue
Selects the marker display color.
Center Marker
1/2/3/4/Off
When the center marker is displayed, selects
the type. Select Off if you do not want to
display the marker.
Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording
format.
Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the safety zone indicator on/off.
Selects the audio channel to record to proxy
data.
Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the safety zone range.
Aspect Marker
Line/Mask/Off
When an aspect marker is to be displayed,
selects the display method. Select Off if you
do not want to display the marker.
Line: Show as white lines.
Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for
areas outside the marker area.
Aspect Select
15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.66:1/
1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1
Selects the aspect ratio of the marker.
Aspect Mask
0% to 12% to 15%
When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this
sets the video signal level of areas outside the
marker area as a percentage value relative to
the video signal level of areas inside the
marker area.
Aspect Safety Zone
On/Off
Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off.
Aspect Safety Area
80%/90%/92.5%/95%
Selects the size of the aspect safety zone
marker (as a percentage of total screen size).
100% Marker
On/Off
Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator
on/off.
User Box
On/Off
Turns the box cursor display on/off.
User Box Width
40 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor width (distance from the
center to the left and right edges).
User Box Height
70 to 500 to 999
Sets the box cursor height (distance from the
center to the top and bottom edges).
Operation >Assignable Switch
Assigns functions to assignable switches.
For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 120).
Item
Setting
Description
<0>
page 120
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch.
<1>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch.
<2>
page 120
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch.
<3>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 3 switch.
<4>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4
switch.
<5>
page 121
Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5
switch.
Lens RET
page 122
Assigns a function to RET button on the lens.
Online
page 121
Assigns a function to the ONLINE button.
Zoom Speed
0 to 20 to 99
When Zoom has been assigned to the
ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom
speed.
Operation >VF Setting
Sets the viewfinder screen.
Item
Setting
Description
User Box H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Color
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder
image.
Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor
center.
User Box V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the box cursor
center.
VF Detail Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of
the viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A).
97
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Gain Switch
Sets the gain value switch settings.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Gain<L>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the L position of the
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN switch.
Iris APL Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the M position of
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
the GAIN switch.
If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to
Standard, sets the mix ratio of peak to mean
auto iris detection value.
Gain<M>
Iris Var Width
40 to 500 to 999
Gain<H>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value for the H position of the
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
GAIN switch.
Sets the width of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Iris Var Height
70 to 500 to 999
Gain <Turbo>
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
function is assigned to an assignable switch.
Sets the height of the window when Iris
Window is set to Var.
Iris Var H Position
–479 to 0 to 479
Shockless Gain
On/Off
Sets the horizontal position of the window
when Iris Window is set to Var.
Iris Var V Position
–464 to 0 to 464
Sets the vertical position of the window when
Iris Window is set to Var.
Turns shockless gain (function that switches
the gain smoothly when the gain is switched)
on/off.
Operation >Auto Iris
Sets the auto iris.
Operation >Zebra
Sets the zebra display for video displayed in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
[Note]
Iris Override
On/Off
Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the
iris more than normal) on/off.
The gamma display assist effect is not applied.
Mode
Backlight/Standard/Spotlight
Selects the control mode of the auto iris.
Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced
darkening of a subject when the subject is
backlit)
Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected
when using optional remote control
connection)
Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced
blown out highlights when subject is lit by
spotlighting)
Item
Setting
Description
Zebra Select
1/2/Both
Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra
2, Both).
Zebra1 Level
0% to 70% to 107%
Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
Zebra1 Aperture
Level
1% to 10% to 20%
Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
Zebra2 Level
1% to 100% to 109%
Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Video Level Warning
On/Off
Sets the control speed (speed of response to
changes in the video). (Larger values specify
quicker reaction times.)
Turns the warnings that appear when the
video level is too bright or too dark on/off.
Shutter Setting
On/Off
Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed
indicators on/off.
Turns the function that ignores brightest
areas to provide a flatter reaction to high
luminance on/off.
ND Filter Position
On/Off
Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off.
Gain Setting
On/Off
Turns the gain setting indicator on/off.
Rec/Play Status
On/Off
Turns the recording and playback indicators
on/off.
Color Temp.
On/Off
Turns the color temperature indicator on/off.
Frame Rate/Interval
On/Off
Turns the special recording mode indicator
on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the convergence target level (larger
values increase brightness.)
Speed
–99 to ±0 to +99
Clip High light
On/Off
Detect Window
1/2/3/4/5/6/Var
Selects the type of auto iris detection window.
Var: Variable
Detect Window
Indication
On/Off
Turns the function that displays the auto iris
detection window frame using a marker on/
off.
98
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Operation >Display On/Off
Selects the items to display in the viewfinder.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Battery Remain
Auto/Voltage/Off
Sets the mode of the remaining battery
capacity and input voltage indicators.
Auto: Displays the remaining capacity,
according to the battery type.
Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless
of the battery type.
Off: No display.
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/
off.
Video Signal Monitor
Off/Waveform/Vector/
Histogram
Turns the output video signal status indicator
on/off, and selects the type of video signal to
display (page 18).
[Note]
Not displayed in the following circumstances.
When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select
and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set
to Off.
Timecode
On/Off
Turns the display of time data (timecode, user
bits, counter, duration) on/off.
Audio Level Meter
On/Off
Turns the display of the audio level meter on/
off.
Clip Name
Media Status
On/Off
Turns the media status indicator on/off.
Focus Assist Indicator On/Off
SD Card(Utility)
On/Off
Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off.
Focus Area Marker
On/Off
Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off.
Focus Position
Meter/Feet/Off
Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off
and selects the display units.
Lens Info
Meter/Feet/Off
Selects whether to display depth of field and
the units to display.
Iris Position
On/Off
Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off.
WRR RF Level
On/Off
Zoom Position
On/Off
Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off.
Turns the wireless tuner reception status
indicator on/off.
Extender
On/Off
Turns the lens extender indicator on/off.
Clip Number
On/Off
Turns the clip information display on/off.
ALAC
On/Off
Turns the lens aberration correction indicator
on/off.
Operation >"!"LED
Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A).
AE Mode
On/Off
Turns AE mode and the AE level setting
indicator on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Gain <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the gain is set to other than 0 dB.
On/Off
Turns the clip name display on/off.
Turns the focus assist indicator on/off.
Focus Mode
On/Off
Turns the focus mode indicator on/off.
White Balance Mode
On/Off
Turns the white balance mode indicator on/
off.
Shutter <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
CC5600K
On/Off
Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off.
White Preset <!>
On/Off
Rec Format
On/Off
Turns the recording format indicator on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/
off.
ATW Run <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when ATW is used.
Timecode Lock
On/Off
Turns the timecode indicator on/off.
Extender <!>
On/Off
Network Condition
On/Off
Turns the network connection status indicator
on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the lens extender is used.
Filter <!>
On/Off
Proxy Status
On/Off
Turns the proxy status indicator on/off.
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the ND filter is set to other than 1.
NW Client Mode
Status
On/Off
Turns the network client mode indicator on/
off.
Iris Override <!>
On/Off
Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/
off when the auto iris override is not set to
Standard.
Streaming Status
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
99
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >White Setting
Makes settings related to white balance adjustment.
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
White Switch<B>
Memory/ATW
Sets the operating mode selected by the B
position of the WHITE BAL switch.
Memory: Auto white balance
ATW: Auto tracing white balance
Warm Cool <A>
Approximate color
temperature display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
Shockless White
Off/1/2/3
Selects the transition time when the WHITE
BAL switch setting is changed (1 is fastest).
When Offset White<A> is set to On, this
specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to
add to the white balance in memory A. (Note
that the error increases for higher offset color
temperatures. Adjust while viewing the actual
image.)
ATW Speed
1/2/3/4/5
Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition
speed (1 is fastest).
Warm Cool
Balance<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
ATW Mode
Natural/Pure
Sets the ATW (Auto tracing white balance)
mode.
Natural: Automatically adjusts ATW to obtain
a natural ambiance according to the
lighting of the scene.
Pure: Automatically adjusts the ATW to obtain
a result closer to primary colors without
residual bluish or reddish colors.
Specifies a more precise color temperature,
for use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting.
Offset White <B>
On/Off
When this is set to On, the offset adjusted
here is added to the white balance of channel
B.
Warm Cool <B>
Approximate color
temperature display
(Approx. 1600K to 3200K to
16000K)
When Offset White<B> is set to On, this
specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to
add to the white balance in memory A. (Note
that the error increases for higher offset color
temperatures. Adjust while viewing the actual
image.)
Warm Cool
Balance<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Specifies a more precise color temperature,
for use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained with the Warm Cool <B> setting.
AWB Fixed Area
On/Off
Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center
of the screen.
Filter White Memory
On/Off
Sets the white balance memory area for each
FILTER knob position number when White
Balance is set to Preset or ATW.
ˎˎWhen Electrical CC is assigned to an
assignable switch, this sets independent
white balance memory areas for Electrical
CC A, B, C, and D settings.
ˎˎWhen Electrical CC is not assigned to an
assignable switch, this sets white balance
memory areas for each FILTER knob
position number.
Operation >Shutter
Sets the shutter operating mode.
Item
Setting
Description
Mode
Speed/Angle
Selects the operating mode of the electronic
shutter.
Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time
(units: seconds).
Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle
(units: degrees).
Operation >Offset White
Makes settings related to white balance offset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Offset White<A>
On/Off
Selects whether to add (On) or not to add
(Off) an offset value to the white balance in
memory A.
Operation >Slow Shutter
Sets the slow shutter.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the slow shutter function on/off.
Number of Frames
2/3/4/5/6/7/8/16
Sets the number of accumulated frames for
the slow shutter function.
100
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >Time Zone
Sets the time zone.
Operation >GPS
Turns location information (GPS) on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Time Zone
UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich
to UTC –12:00
Selects the difference in time from UTC
(Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30
minutes.
GPS
On/Off
Turns the GPS function on/off.
Operation >Clip
Makes settings relating to clip names and management.
[Note]
Operation >Planning Metadata
Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load from Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Loads planning metadata from the SxS
memory card in slot A.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A.
Select a file to display the properties screen.
Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is
“.” cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer.
Item
Setting
Description
Clip Naming
Title/Plan
Selects the clip naming format.
Title: Name specified by Title Prefix.
Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if
no name is specified in planning
metadata, the name specified by Title
Prefix is used.)
Title Prefix
Text input
Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric
characters) of clip titles using a character
string entry screen (page 88).
Number Set
Settings vary according to the
Clip Naming setting.
Sets the numeric portion of the clip name.
When Clip Naming is set to Title:
0001 to 9999
When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a
planning metadata file is loaded:
00001 to 99999
Operation >Update Media
Updates the media’s management file.
[Note]
This item is not displayed when the file system is
set to FAT.
Load from Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
[Note]
This item is not displayed when the file system is
set to FAT.
Properties
Execute/Cancel
Displays the planning metadata content
loaded in the camcorder (execute by selecting
Execute).
Clear Memory
Execute/Cancel
Clears the planning metadata loaded in the
camcorder (execute by selecting Execute).
Clip Name Disp
Title1(ASCII)/Title2(UTF-8)
Selects the display format if the clip name is
specified in planning metadata (page 53).
Sort by
Date/Time (0-9)/
Date/Time (9-0)
Date/Time (0-9): Sort the file list in ascending
order in the Date/Time column (oldest
creation date at the top).
Date/Time (9-0): Sort the file list in
descending order in the Date/Time
column (newest creation date at the top).
[Note]
This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT.
Item
Setting
Description
Media(A)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the
SxS memory card in slot A (execute by
selecting Execute).
Media(B)
Execute/Cancel
Updates the management information of the
SxS memory card in slot B (execute by
selecting Execute).
Loads planning metadata from the SxS
memory card in slot B.
Execute to display a list of planning metadata
files stored on the SxS memory card in slot B.
Select a file to display the properties screen.
Operation >USB
Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of
the camcorder to USB media.
Item
Select Folder
Setting
Description
Selects a folder on the USB media.
Creates a new folder on the USB media.
101
7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu
Operation >USB
Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of
the camcorder to USB media.
Item
Setting
Description
View Clip List
Displays a list of clips on the USB media.
Rename Folder
Renames a folder on the USB media.
Error Check
On/Off
Selects whether to perform error checking
when copying clips from the recording media
inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder
to USB media.
Format USB
Execute/Cancel
Formats the USB media (execute by selecting
Execute).
Copy to USB
Media(A) to USB/
Media(B) to USB/
Media(A)(B) to USB
Selects the target slot when copying all clips
from an SxS card slot.
Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A.
Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot B.
Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A and slot
B.
Media Remain
(Free space: numeric display
and bar display)
Displays the remaining free space on the USB
media.
102
7. Menu Display and Settings
Paint Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Paint >Switch Status
Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Paint >White
Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually.
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <A>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory A.
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the gamma function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma function on/off.
Color Temp Balance
<A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain value saved in
memory A (linked to R gain and B gain).
Matrix
On/Off
Turns the matrix function on/off.
R Gain <A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Knee
On/Off
Turns the knee function on/off.
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory A.
White Clip
On/Off
Turns the white clip function on/off.
B Gain <A>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory A.
If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next
turned on.
Color Temp <B>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Displays the white balance color temperature
saved in memory B.
Turns the detail function on/off.
Color Temp Balance
<B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance gain values saved in
memory B (linked R gain and B gain).
R Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value saved in
memory B.
B Gain <B>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value saved in
memory B.
[Note]
Detail(QFHD)
On/Off
Detail(HD)
On/Off
Aperture
On/Off
Turns the aperture function on/off.
Flare
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Test Saw
On/Off
Turns the test signal on/off.
Paint >HDR Paint Setting
Sets HDR settings when Shooting Mode is set to HDR.
Item
Setting
Description
HLG Look
Natural/Mild/Live
Sets the HLG type in HDR mode.
Natural: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG).
Mild: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers milder overall
picture quality than Live Look.
Live: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers improved HDR
performance.
HDR Black Offset
–95 to ±0 to +103
Sets the HDR black offset relative to the SDR
setting (Master Black) in HDR mode.
HDR Knee
On/Off
Turns the HDR signal knee correction function
on/off when in HDR mode.
HDR Knee Point
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee point for HDR signals when HDR
Knee is set to On.
HDR Knee Slope
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee slope for HDR signals when
HDR Knee is set to On.
HDR Black
Compression
On/Off
Turns the function to compress the Black level
of the HDR video to match the SDR video on/
off.
Paint >Black
Sets the black level (image level without lighting).
You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks.
Item
Setting
Description
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
R Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R black level.
B Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B black level.
Paint >Flare
Makes settings related to flare correction.
Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects
of bright regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast.
It is caused by reflected light inside the lens.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
Master Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master flare correction level.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare correction level.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare correction level.
B Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare correction level.
103
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Gamma(HDR)
Displays HDR gamma settings.
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma Select
S-Log3
HLG(Natural)
HLG(Mild)
---
HDR gamma settings (display only)
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the
impression of an image.
Item
Setting
Description
Gamma Select
Settings vary according to the
Gamma Category setting.
Selects the gamma table used for gamma
correction.
Paint >Gamma
Makes settings related to gamma correction.
Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the
impression of an image.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
Step Gamma
0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90
(0.05 steps)
Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps.
Master Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master gamma level.
R Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gamma level.
G Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G gamma level.
B Gamma
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gamma level.
Gamma Category
STD/HG/User/---
Selects the gamma category.
STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals
HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and
color reproduction of shooting with film
User: User-defined gamma curve created
using CvpFileEditorTM V4.2
---: No SDR output
When Gamma Category is STD
STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent
STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain
STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain
STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent
STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain
When Gamma Category is HG
HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to 100% video output.
HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to 100% video output.
HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to 109% video output.
HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to 109% video output.
When Gamma Category is User
User 1: Gamma table registered in User1
User 2: Gamma table registered in User2
User 3: Gamma table registered in User3
User 4: Gamma table registered in User4
User 5: Gamma table registered in User5
When there is no SDR output
--Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black
(dark) parts of the picture.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function
on/off.
[Note]
To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation
Mode to Low Key.
104
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Black Gamma
Makes settings related to black gamma correction.
Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black
(dark) parts of the picture.
Item
Setting
Description
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the effective range of the black
gamma correction.
Low: 0 to 3.6%
L.Mid: 0 to 7.2%
H.Mid: 0 to 14.4%
Master Black Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black gamma level.
Paint >Knee
Makes settings related to knee correction.
Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts
of the image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image.
The signal level where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee
compression is called the “knee slope.”
Paint >Detail(QFHD)/Detail(HD)
Makes settings related to detail adjustments in 4K/HD mode.
Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the
outline of the subject.
[Note]
During simultaneous QFHD/HD output, these settings are not applied to the HD output.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the detail adjustment function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail level.
H/V Ratio
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level
and the V detail level.
Crispening
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the crispening level.
Level Depend
On/Off
Turns the level dependence adjustment
function on/off.
Level Depend Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the level dependence level.
Frequency
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the center frequency of the H detail
signal (larger values give finer detail).
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
Knee Aperture
On/Off
Point
75% to 95% to 109%
Sets the knee point when the DCC function is
off.
Turns the knee aperture correction function
on/off.
Knee Aperture Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee aperture level.
Slope
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is
off.
Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side
and black-side directions.
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
White Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white-side detail limiter.
[Note]
Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side detail limiter.
V Black Limit
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the black-side V detail limiter.
V Detail Creation
NAM/Y/G/G+R
Selects the source signal used to generate the
V detail signal.
NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal,
V detail signal created from the G signal,
or V detail signal created from the B
signal, whichever signal has the highest
level
Y: Y signal
G: G signal
G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal
and R signal in a 1:1 ratio
To enable the knee saturation function, set
Saturation Mode to Knee.
Knee Saturation Level –99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the knee saturation level.
Paint >White Clip
Makes settings related to white clip adjustment.
White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video
output signal value is called the “white clip level.”
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/
off.
Level
90.0% to 108.0% to 109.0%
Sets the white clip level.
The default setting is 108.0% when the
system frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98.
The setting is 105.0% when the system
frequency is 50.25.
105
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Aperture
Makes settings related to aperture correction.
Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to
the video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the aperture correction function on/off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the aperture level.
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset
Matrix.” You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix”
function adjusts the matrix to control color reproduction.
Item
Setting
Description
Preset Select
1: SMPTE240M
2: ITU-709
3: SMPTE Wide
4: NTSC
5: EBU
6: PAL
Selects a preset matrix.
1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent
2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent
3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent
4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent
5: EBU: EBU equivalent
6: PAL: PAL equivalent
Paint >Skin Detail
Makes settings related to skin detail correction.
Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range,
for the purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the skin detail correction function on/
off.
User Matrix
On/Off
Area Detection
Execute/Cancel
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for skin detail correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Turns the user matrix correction function on/
off.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color of the entire
image.
Area Indication
On/Off
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas
targeted for skin detail correction on/off.
Phase
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire
image.
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the skin detail level.
User Matrix R-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for
skin detail correction.
User Matrix R-B
User Matrix G-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
Hue
0 to 359
Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin
detail correction.
User Matrix G-B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
Width
0 to 40 to 90
Sets the range for the hue of the color
targeted for skin detail correction.
User Matrix B-R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
User Matrix B-G
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
Paint >Matrix
Makes settings related to matrix correction.
Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction.
You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset
Matrix.” You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix”
function adjusts the matrix to control color reproduction.
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the matrix correction function on/off.
Adaptive Matrix
On/Off
Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off.
Preset Matrix
On/Off
Turns the preset matrix function on/off.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the multi matrix correction function on/
off.
Area Indication
On/Off
Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the
color area targeted for multi matrix correction
on/off.
Color Detection
Execute/Cancel
Displays a color detection screen for detecting
colors for multi matrix correction (execute by
selecting Execute).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to
default values (execute by selecting Execute).
106
7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu
Paint >Multi Matrix
Makes settings related to multi matrix correction.
Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space.
Item
Setting
Description
Axis
B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/
YL–/YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/
CY+/B–
Sets the color targeted for multi matrix
correction (16-axis mode)
Hue
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi
matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Saturation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of the color targeted for
multi matrix correction for each 16-axis mode.
Paint >V Modulation
Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction.
V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship
between the lens and prism.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the V modulation shading correction
function on/off.
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master V modulation level.
R V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the R signal.
G V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the G signal.
B V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the V modulation level of the B signal.
Paint >Saturation Mode
Makes settings related to saturation correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Saturation Mode
Knee/Low Key
Selects whether the saturation function
operates at high levels (Knee) or low levels
(Low Key).
Knee Saturation
On/Off
Turns the knee saturation function on/off.
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function
on/off.
Low Key Saturation
On/Off
Turns the low key saturation function on/off.
Paint >Noise Suppression
Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression).
This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components
of the subject.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the noise suppression function on/off.
Level
Low/Mid/High/Super
Selects the noise suppression level.
Gain Link
On/Off
Sets whether to link the noise suppression
level to the gain.
–3dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets –3 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
0dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Paint >Low Key Saturation
Makes settings related to low key saturation correction.
Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image.
Sets 0 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
3dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 3 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
Item
Setting
Description
6dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Setting
On/Off
Turns the low key saturation correction
function on/off.
Sets 6 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
9dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 9 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
To enable the low key saturation function, set
Saturation Mode to Low Key.
12dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 12 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
[Note]
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance
areas.
18dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 18 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
Range
Low/L.Mid/H.Mid
Selects the luminance level for which low key
saturation is enabled.
24dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 24 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
30dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 30 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
36dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 36 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
42dB
Off/Low/Mid/High/Super
Sets 42 dB noise suppression level when Gain
Link is set to On.
107
7. Menu Display and Settings
Maintenance Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
Maintenance >White Shading
Makes settings related to white shading correction.
White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in
bright areas arising from lens characteristics.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for white shading
correction.
White H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
White H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction
value for the horizontal direction.
White V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
White V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction
value for the vertical direction.
White Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the white shading SAW/parabola
correction function on/off.
Maintenance >Black Shading
Makes settings related to black shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Channel Select
Red/Green/Blue
Selects the target for black shading correction.
Black H Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value
for the horizontal direction.
Black H Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction
value for the horizontal direction.
Black V Saw
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW black shading correction value
for the vertical direction.
Black V Para
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola black shading correction
value for the vertical direction.
Black Saw/Para
On/Off
Turns the black shading SAW/parabola
correction function on/off.
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
Master Gain (TMP)
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Sets a temporary master gain value.
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
Maintenance >Battery
Makes settings related to batteries.
Item
Setting
Near End:Info Battery 5%/10%/15%...95%/100%
Description
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery Near End” warning when using a
BP-GL95B battery pack.
End:Info Battery
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5%
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery End” warning when using a
BP‑GL95B battery pack.
Near End:Sony
Battery
11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery Near End” warning when using a
BP-L60S/L80S battery pack.
End:Sony Battery
11.0V to 12.5V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery End” warning when using a BP-L60S/
L80S battery pack.
Near End:Other
Battery
11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery Near End” warning when using a
non-Sony battery pack.
End: Other Battery
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery End” warning when using a non-Sony
battery pack.
Detected Battery
Sony Info Battery/
Sony Battery/Other Battery/
DC IN
Displays the result of automatic battery pack
type detection.
Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm
Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage.
Item
Setting
Description
DC Low Voltage1
11.5V to 17V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery Near End” warning when using an
external power source connected to the DC IN
connector.
DC Low Voltage2
11.0V to 14.0V
(0.1V steps)
Sets the threshold value for displaying the
“Battery End” warning when using an external
power source connected to the DC IN
connector.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Front MIC Select
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the front microphone is
monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
108
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Rear XLR Auto
On/Off
Turns the automatic detection function on/off
for detecting cable connections on the AUDIO
IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel.
Limiter Mode
Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Front MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 1.
Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation
level) for large input signals when adjusting
the audio input level manually. Select Off if
not using the limiter.
Output Limiter
On/Off
Turns the audio output limiter on/off.
Front MIC CH2 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference level of the front
microphone for channel 2.
CH1 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the
AUDIO IN CH1 switch is set to MIC.
CH2 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
–70dB/–60dB/–50dB/
–40dB/–30dB
Selects the reference input level when the
AUDIO IN CH2 switch is set to MIC.
CH3 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter
on/off.
Line Input Ref
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Selects the reference input level when the
AUDIO IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are
set to LINE.
CH4 Wind Filter
On/Off
Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction
filter on/off.
Off/Set
Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is
turned all the way down.
Off: Inaudible
Set: Audible
1kHz Tone on Color
Bars
On/Off/Auto
Min Alarm Volume
Sets whether to output (On) or not output
(Off) a 1 kHz test signal in color bar mode.
Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the
AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO.
MIC CH1 Level
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
Speaker Attenuate
Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB
Selects the volume from the monitor speakers
(does not affect earphone volume).
Headphone Out
Mono/Stereo
Selects whether the earphones are monaural
(Mono) or stereo (Stereo).
Reference Level
–20dB/–18dB/–16dB/
–12dB/EBUL
Sets the reference input level. It also sets the
output level of the 1 kHz test signal.
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 1.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
Reference Out
+4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL
Sets the output level relative to the reference
input level.
MIC CH2 Level
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of
analog audio signals recorded on channels 1
and 2, and selects whether to make the
adjustments separately for each channel
(Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo).
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
when recording input audio from the front
microphone on channel 2.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked control)
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Mono/Stereo
Automatically adjusts the input level of
analog audio signals recorded on channels 3
and 4, and selects whether to make the
adjustments separately for each channel
(Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo).
Rear1/WRR Level
Side1/Front/Front+Side1
AGC Spec
–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/
–15dB/–17dB
Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation
level).
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
of a wireless microphone or a device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on
the rear panel.
Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL
knob (linked control)
109
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Maintenance >Audio
Makes settings related to audio.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Rear2/WRR Level
Side2/Front/Front+Side2
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
of a wireless microphone or a device
connected to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on
the rear panel.
Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC
LEVEL knob (linked control)
TX Input Level
---/Mic/Line
Displays whether the input level of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH Select is
set to microphone (Mic) or line (Line).
TX ATT Level
---
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range
varies depending on the transmitter.)
TX LCF Frequency
---
Sets the low cut filter frequency of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH Select.
(The setting range varies depending on the
transmitter.)
TX System Delay
Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms
Sets the amount of audio delay.
Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount
of delay so that the delay in the audio
from the wireless tuner is zero.
0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of
estimated wireless system delay, for cases
in which several wireless systems are
being used via a device such as an audio
mixer.
TX RF Power
High (Power value) mW/Mid
(Power value) mW/Low
(Power value) mW
Sets the RF power level of the transmitter
communicating on the channel selected by
WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies
depending on the transmitter.)
TX Power Save
Active/Sleep
Sets the power saving mode of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH Select.
Active: Set the transmitter to startup mode.
Sleep: Set the transmitter to power saving
mode.
TX-Cam Power Sync
Off/On
Sets whether the transmitter power-save
state is also switched in sync with the POWER
switch of the camcorder.
Audio CH3 Level
Side3/Front/Front+Side3
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 3.
Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Audio CH4 Level
Side4/Front/Front+Side4
Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level
recorded on channel 4.
Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel
Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob
(linked control)
Maintenance >WRR Setting
Makes settings related to the wireless tuner.
Item
Setting
Description
WRR Valid CH Sel
All/CH1
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of
the wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1).
WRR CH Select
TX1/TX2
Selects the reception channel for display in
the menu.
TX1: Displays channel 1.
TX2: Displays channel 2.
WRR Delay Comp
On/Off
Selects whether to enable (On) or disable
(Off) the delay compensation function for
wireless input audio. (When On is selected, all
E-E output audio is delayed by about 8 ms.)
TX
---
Displays the name of the transmitter whose
signals are being received on the channel
selected by WRR CH Select.
TX Audio Peak
---/Peak
Displays whether the AF level of the
transmitter whose signals are being received
on the channel selected by WRR CH Select are
over peak.
110
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Time Code
Makes settings related to timecode.
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
TC Out
Auto/Generator
Selects the timecode output.
Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value
during recording, and the timecode
reader value during playback.
Generator: Outputs the timecode generator
value during recording and playback.
HD SDI Remote I/F
Off/Characters/
Green Tally/Red Tally
DF/NDF
DF/NDF
Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-dropframe mode (NDF).
LTC UBIT
Fix/Time
Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits.
Fix: Records user-specified data.
Time: Records the current time.
Counter Display
Counter/Duration
Select the method used to reset the counter
value displayed on the viewfinder screen.
Counter: Continue to increment until the
RESET button is pressed.
Duration: Reset each time that recording is
started.
Sets whether to enable the recording control
function for an external device connected to
the SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of
the camcorder. If enabled, it selects the
indicator used to display the recording state
of the external device.
Off: Recording control function is disabled.
Chara: Displayed using the external device
control indicator on the status display in
the viewfinder.
G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator
(green tally) in the viewfinder.
R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator
(recording red tally) in the viewfinder.
HDMI TC Out
On/Off
Sets whether to output the timecode to
devices for other purposes, using HDMI.
Color Bars Select
ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE
Selects the color bar type.
User Menu Only
On/Off
Selects whether to display the User menu
only (On) or display the menu list (Off) when
the camcorder is displaying the menu.
User Menu with Lock
On/Off
Selects whether to lock the menu display,
showing the User menu only.
On: Enter an arbitrary passcode number to
lock the menu display. (Only the User
menu is displayed.)
Off: Enter the passcode number entered
when “On” was selected to unlock the
menu display. (When unlocked, the
normal menu list is displayed.)
Maintenance >Essence Mark
Makes settings related to essence marks.
Item
Setting
Description
Find Mode
Clip/Rec Start
Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV
button is pressed.
Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous
recording start mark, respectively.
Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when
the NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the
start of the current clip when the PREV
button is pressed (or moves to the start of
the previous clip if the PREV button is
pressed at the start of the clip).
[Note]
In normal menu display operation, this item is not
displayed.
For details about menu display operation, see
page 89.
RM Common
Memory
On/Off
Selects whether to share (On) or not share
(Off) settings between when using a remote
control unit connection and when the
camcorder is operated locally.
111
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Camera Config
Makes settings related to various camcorder operations.
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
RM Rec Start
RM/Camera/PARA
Selects which of the recording start/stop
buttons are enabled when a remote control
unit is connected.
RM: Remote control unit
Camera: Camcorder
PARA: Both
Color Temp Balance
<P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the fine color temperature settings, for
use when a satisfactory image cannot be
obtained using Color Temp <P>.
R Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R gain preset value.
B Gain <P>
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B gain preset value.
AWB Enable <P>
On/Off
Turns execution of the AWB (auto white
balance) function on/off when the WHITE BAL
switch is set to PRST.
Detail Control(RM/
RCP)
HD/QFHD
Sets the signal format for detail control by an
RM/RCP in QFHD recording format to HD or
QFHD.
SET Key on
Thumbnail
Pause/Play
Selects the operation when the MENU knob is
pressed with only one thumbnail selected.
Maintenance >White Filter
Makes settings related to filters.
ALAC
Auto/Off
Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens
Aberration Correction) automatically.
Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an
ALAC-compatible lens is attached and
ALAC is enabled.
Off: Do not execute.
Item
Setting
Description
ND Filter C.Temp
On/Off
Turns the function that assigns electrical CC
filters to ND filters on/off.
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical
CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1).
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when electrical
CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to
4).
Electrical CC<A>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the
electrical CC filter switching function is
assigned to an assignable switch.
Electrical CC<B>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K
Selects the color temperature when the
electrical CC filter switching function is
assigned to an assignable switch.
Electrical CC<C>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Selects the color temperature when the
electrical CC filter switching function is
assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----”
if not using C.
Electrical CC<D>
3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/
---
Selects the color temperature when the
electrical CC filter switching function is
assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----”
if not using D.
[Note]
Depending on the aberration correction lens, the
aberration correction function may not be activated
immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the
viewfinder screen) after turning the power on, even
when this setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn
the lens zoom ring and focus ring to the end stop
and back, and check whether the “ALAC” indicator
appears on the viewfinder screen.
Contact a Sony service representative for information
about aberration correction lenses.
SD HDMI
On/Off
Turns the HDMI output signal to SD format
conversion function on/off.
HD Modulation
High/Normal
Sets the video resolution of the HD output
signal down-converted from the QFHD signal.
High: High resolution characteristic that uses
QFHD oversampling to emphasize detail.
Normal: Characteristic relatively close to
existing HD cameras (such as the PDW‑750).
Maintenance >Preset White
Makes settings related to white balance preset values.
Item
Setting
Description
Color Temp <P>
1500K to 3200K to 50000K
Sets the white balance preset value.
112
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >DCC Adjust
Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control).
Maintenance >Auto Shading
Executes auto black shading correction.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
DCC Function Select
DCC/Fix
Selects the setting method for the knee point
when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM
with DCC on.
DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to
match the luminance of the subject.
Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value.
Auto Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Executes auto black shading correction
(execute by selecting Execute).
Reset Black Shading
Execute/Cancel
Clears the black shading correction value
(execute by selecting Execute).
Master Gain (TMP)
–3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ Sets a temporary master gain value. (The
18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB
value is the same as the value selected with
the GAIN switch.)
DCC D Range
400%/450%/500%/550%/
600%
Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/
DCC switch is set to CAM with DCC on.
DCC Point
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC minimum knee point.
DCC Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected
value.
DCC Delay Time
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the DCC control speed (speed of
response to changes in the video).
DCC Peak Filter
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the
peaks in DCC detected values.
Maintenance >APR
Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction.
Item
Setting
Description
APR
Execute/Cancel
Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction
function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode
(execute by selecting Execute).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Deletes white flecks data that were added by
execution of the APR and automatic black
balance adjustment functions (execute by
selecting Execute).
Maintenance >Flicker Reduce
Makes settings related to the flicker correction function.
You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness
varies periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency
and the recording frame rate.
Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App
Configures connection settings using the network setup assist tool.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Mode
Auto/On/Off
Sets the operation of the flicker correction
function.
On: Always operating.
Auto: Operates when flicker is detected.
Off: Does not operate.
Setup
Frequency
60Hz/50Hz
Synchronizes with the power supply
frequency of lighting causing flicker.
The factory setting is 60Hz when System
Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98.
The factory setting is 50Hz when System
Frequency is set to 50 or 25.
Maintenance >Genlock
Makes settings related to genlock.
Item
Setting
Description
Genlock
On/Off
Turns the genlock function on/off.
Reference
Internal/External(HD)/
External(SD)/SDI IN/CA
Displays the type of reference signal used by
the camcorder.
Setting
Description
Starts configuring connection settings using
the network setup assist tool.
Maintenance >Access Authentication
Sets settings related to access authentication.
Item
Setting
Description
User Name
(Displays the current user
name.)
Sets the user name (arbitrary name for access
authentication). Set to “admin” by factory
default.
113
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Access Authentication
Sets settings related to access authentication.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Password
*******
Sets the password for access authentication.
Valid passwords must be 8 characters or
longer, and contain at least one alphanumeric
character and at least one numeric character.
The entered password is displayed using
asterisks. The entered characters are visible
while the SHIFT key is pressed.
Wi-Fi Station Detail
Settings
Scan Networks (Execute/
Cancel)
Starts auto detection of network destinations
for connection (execute by selecting Execute).
SSID (SSID of access point)
Enter the SSID of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi
Station mode.
The following characters are valid.
Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z
Alphabetic (lower case): a to z
Numeric: 0 to 9
Symbols: !”#$%&’*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~
Password (password of access
point)
Enter the password of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi
Station mode.
The entered password is displayed using
asterisks. The entered characters are visible
while the SHIFT key is pressed.
The following characters are valid.
Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z
Alphabetic (lower case): a to z
Numeric: 0 to 9
Symbols: !”#$%&’*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~
DHCP (On/Off)
Sets DHCP in Wi-Fi Station mode.
When set to On, an IP address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder. To enter the
camcorder IP address manually, set to Off.
IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
192.168.1.50)
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Subnet Mask (DHCP/On:
obtain automatically, DHCP/
Off: 255.255.255.0)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
0.0.0.0)
Enter the gateway for the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
DNS Auto (On/Off)
Enables/disables automatic DNS.
When set to On, the address of the DNS
server is obtained automatically.
[Note]
The password setting is reset when updating the
firmware of the unit from a version prior to 2.0 to
version 2.0 or later, or a version prior to 3.1 to version
3.1 or later. In this case, set the password again.
Generate Password
Execute/Cancel
Show Settings
Automatically generates a password for
access authentication.
Displays the user name and password for
access authentication.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns the network function on/off.
Wi-Fi Mode
Wi-Fi Access Point/
Wi-Fi Station/Off
Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN
connections.
NFC
Execute/Cancel
Initiates a one-touch connection using NFC
(execute by selecting Execute).
WPS
Execute/Cancel
Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute
by selecting Execute).
Channel
Sets the wireless LAN channel.
Auto(5GHz)/Auto/CH1/CH2/
CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/
[Note]
CH9/CH10/CH11
“Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on
SSID & Password
(SSID display)
(Password display)
Displays the SSID and password.
SSID
(SSID display)
Displays the SSID of the access point of the
destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi
Station mode.
the wireless LAN module used.
Wi-Fi Station Remote On/Off
Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi
remote control, web menu, and the “Content
Browser Mobile” application when connected
to a network using Wi-Fi Station mode.
Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/ Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
On: obtain automatically, DNS Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0)
114
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Maintenance >Network
Makes settings related to network connections.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Wi-Fi Station Detail
Settings
Secondary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain
automatically, DNS Auto/Off:
0.0.0.0)
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Wired LAN Detail
Settings
DHCP (On/Off)
Enables/disables DHCP.
When set to On, an IP address is automatically
assigned to the camcorder.
To enter the camcorder IP address manually,
set to Off.
IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
192.168.2.50)
Enter the IP address of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Subnet Mask (DHCP/On:
obtain automatically, DHCP/
Off: 255.255.255.0)
Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain
automatically, DHCP/Off:
0.0.0.0)
Enter the gateway for the access point.
Enabled only when DHCP is Off.
DNS Auto (On/Off)
Enables/disables automatic DNS.
When set to On, the address of the DNS
server is obtained automatically.
Primary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain
automatically, DNS Auto/Off:
0.0.0.0)
Enter the primary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Secondary DNS Server (DNS
Auto/On: obtain
automatically, DNS Auto/Off:
0.0.0.0)
Enter the secondary DNS server for the router.
Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off.
Device Name (Wi-Fi)
Displays the name of network device attached
to the USB wireless LAN module connector
IP Address (Wi-Fi)
Displays the IP address when connected to a
wireless LAN.
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi)
Displays the subnet mask when connected to
a wireless LAN.
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless
LAN Module attached to the camcorder.
Regenerate Password Execute/Cancel
Regenerates a password (execute by selecting
Execute).
Modem
On/Off
Enables/disables the network connection
using a 3G/4G modem or USB tethering.
Modem Remote
On/Off
Enables/disables the web UI, Wi-Fi remote
control, and CBM remote control when a
modem is connected.
[Note]
The functions are disabled regardless of this setting
when a 3G/4G modem is connected.
Public Key Creation
Execute/Cancel
Generates a public key/private key.
[Note]
The generated public key/private key will be deleted
when Maintenance >Network Reset is executed.
Public Key Clear
Execute/Cancel
Create Key Date
Clears a public key/private key.
Displays the creation date of the public key/
private key.
Wired LAN
Enable/Disable
Enables/disables wired LAN connection.
Wired LAN Remote
On/Off
Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi
remote control, web menu, and the “Content
Browser Mobile” application when connected
to a network using a LAN cable.
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX
Station.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns network client mode on/off.
[Note]
When set to On, the firmware version cannot be
updated.
Preset Select
Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3
Selects preset settings (Preset 1/Preset 2/
Preset 3) comprising network client mode
connection settings configured beforehand.
115
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Network Client Mode
Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX
Station.
[Note]
Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items.
Item
Setting
Description
Preset 1
(Preset name display)
Enter the preset name.
CCM Address
Sets the address of the CCM to connect.
Host name or IP address
CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443))
Sets the port number of the CCM to connect.
User Name
Sets the user name for authentication of the
CCM to connect.
Password
Sets the password of the CCM to connect.
The entered password is displayed using
asterisks. The entered characters are visible
while the SHIFT key is pressed.
NCM with Proxy (Enable/
Disable)
Enable: Enable proxy recording when
connected with a CCM.
Disable: Disable proxy recording when
connected with a CCM.
Camera Control (Enable/
Disable)
Enables/disables camera control operation
when connected with a CCM.
Camera Setting (Always/
Onetime/Off)
Enables/disables ALL file operations when
connected with a CCM.
Always: Enable ALL file operations all the
time.
Onetime: Enable ALL file operations one time.
Off: Disable ALL file operations.
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network file transfer.
Item
Setting
Description
Remote File Transfer
Enable/Disable
Sets whether to enable/disable switching to
transfer mode to transfer original files
recorded on the camcorder by remote
operation over a network.
Enable: Enable switching to transfer mode by
remote operation over a network.
It is not necessary to execute a transfer
using Maintenance >File Transfer.
Disable: Disable switching to transfer mode
by remote operation over a network.
It is necessary to execute a transfer using
Maintenance >File Transfer.
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Off/On
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Default Upload
Server
Sony Ci/NCM RX Server/
Server Settings1/Server
Settings2/Server Settings3
Selects the destination server for uploading
original files and proxy files.
For Server Settings1 to 3, the name of the
servers entered in Display Name on the
Upload Settings page of the web menu are
displayed. For details, see “To register a
destination server” (page 76).
Clear Completed Jobs Execute/Cancel
Clears the transfer completed jobs from the
job list.
Clear All Jobs
Clears all jobs registered in the job list.
Execute/Cancel
View Job List
Displays the transfer job list.
Preset 2
Same as Preset 1
Same as Preset 1
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Preset 3
Same as Preset 1
Same as Preset 1
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
On/Off
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Maintenance >File Transfer
Makes settings related to network file transfer.
[Notes]
Item
Setting
Description
File Transfer
Execute/Cancel
Switches to transfer mode (execute by
selecting Execute).
ˎˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power
on again.
ˎˎ When set to On, the monitoring function of
Content Browser Mobile is not available.
Preset Select
Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3
Selects a streaming preset.
The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset
2/Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the
settings in a preset.
116
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Streaming
Makes settings related to streaming.
Maintenance >Language
Selects the display language for messages.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Size
HD Auto/
1280×720/
640×360/
480×270/
320×180
Sets the size of video for streaming.
When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to
1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the
setting of the recording format recorded on
the SxS memory card or the format of the clip
to be played back.
Select
English/
Espanol/Русский
Item
Setting
Description
9Mbps/
6Mbps/
3Mbps/
2Mbps/
1Mbps/
0.5Mbps/
0.3Mbps(Mono L)/
0.3Mbps(Mono R)/
0.2Mbps(Mono L)/
0.2Mbps(Mono R)
Sets the bit rate of video for streaming.
The selectable bit rate varies depending on
the Size setting.
Hours (System)
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot
be reset).
Hours (Reset)
ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the
Internet. Accordingly, the data may potentially
be exposed to other parties. Always check that
the transmission destination can receive the
streaming data.
ˎˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party
if the address or other settings are configured
incorrectly.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the
status of the network.
ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with
excessive motion.
ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is
set to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce
this, select a smaller size for the Size setting.
xxxxH
(xxxx hours)
Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be
reset).
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute
by selecting Execute).
Bit Rate
Description
/
Selects the display language for messages.
Maintenance >Hours Meter
Makes settings related to the digital hours meter.
[Notes]
Maintenance >Network Reset
Returns network-related settings to their factory default state.
Item
Setting
Description
Reset
Execute/Cancel
Resets network related settings (execute by
selecting Execute).
[Note]
The public key/private key generated using
Maintenance >Network >Public Key Creation will be
deleted when this item is executed.
Type
MPEG-2 TS/UDP/
MPEG-2 TS/RTP
Selects the type of video for streaming.
Maintenance >Fan Control
Sets the fan control mode.
Destination Address
Character string (0.0.0.0)
Enter the address of the transmission
destination server for streaming data.
Item
Setting
Description
Setting
Auto/Minimum/Off in Rec
Selects the fan control mode.
Destination Port
1 to 65545 (1234)
Enter the port number of the transmission
destination server used for streaming.
Audio Channel
CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4
Selects the audio channel for the streaming
output.
Maintenance >Clock Set
Sets the internal clock.
Item
Setting
Description
Date Mode
YYMMDD/MMDDYY/
DDMMYY
Selects the display format for dates.
12H/24H
12H/24H
Selects the clock display format.
Date
Displays the date setting screen.
Time
Displays the time setting screen.
Maintenance >VF Display Setting
Makes settings related to the viewfinder display.
Item
Setting
Description
Chara/Marker
Brightness
5/4/3/2/1
Sets the brightness of character strings, icons,
and markers superimposed in the viewfinder
image.
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Item
Number
Setting
Description
Displays the software version of the
camcorder (Vx.xx).
117
7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu
Maintenance >Version
Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder.
Item
Setting
Description
Version Up
Execute/Cancel
Updates the software version of the
camcorder, using a card in the UTILITY SD card
slot (execute by selecting Execute).
The following SD cards are supported.
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
[Note]
Cannot be selected when the version updater SD
card is not inserted or when Network Client Mode
>Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to On.
Net-Func Version
Number
Displays the firmware version of the wireless
LAN connection function of the camcorder
(Vx.xx).
[Note]
Not displayed when XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Setting
in the Operation menu is set to Off and Network
>Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to Off.
Net-Func Ver.Up
Execute/Cancel
Updates the software for the wireless LAN
connection function of the camcorder, using a
card in the PROXY SD card slot (execute by
selecting Execute).
The following SD cards are supported.
ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB)
ˎˎ SDXC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher,
non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB)
[Note]
Cannot be selected when Network Client Mode
>Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to On.
118
7. Menu Display and Settings
File Menu
Default values are shown underlined and in bold text.
File >User File
Makes settings relating to user file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading user file settings
from an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving user file settings
onto an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the
file ID of user files.
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Clear All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and presets of All
File menu items (excluding some) to their
factory default values (execute by selecting
Execute).
For details, see “Items Saved in User Data”
(page 151).
3Sec Clear Preset
On/Off
Turns the function that clears the currents
settings and presets of each item on/off,
when the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
is pushed up and held for three seconds in
the CANCEL/PRST position.
Recall User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the value of menu items registered in
the User menu to the preset values (execute
by selecting [Execute]).
Store User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Stores the value of menu items registered in
the User menu items as the preset values
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
File >Scene File
Makes settings related to scene file operations.
Clear User Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values
of menu items registered in the User menu to
the factory default values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Recall Internal
Memory
Displays a screen for recalling scene files from
internal memory.
Store Internal
Memory
Displays a screen for storing scene files in
internal memory.
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading scene files from
an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving scene files onto
an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the
file ID of scene files.
Load Customize Data On/Off
Sets whether to load User menu customized
information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
Load White Data
Sets whether to load white balance
information when [Load SD Card] is executed.
On/Off
File >All File
Makes settings related to ALL file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading All File settings
from an SD card.
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving All File settings
onto an SD card.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the
file ID of All Files.
All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Returns all items to their preset values
(execute by selecting Execute).
Store All Preset
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of all items as the
preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]).
Item
Scene White Data
Setting
On/Off
Description
Sets whether to reflect the while balance data
of scene files when recalling scene files.
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Store Reference
Execute/Cancel
Stores the current settings of reference file
target menu items as the preset values
(execute by selecting [Execute]).
Clear Reference
Execute/Cancel
Returns the current settings and preset values
of reference file target menu items to the
factory default values (execute by selecting
[Execute]).
Load Reference(SD
Card)
Execute/Cancel
Loads reference file settings from and SD card
and sets the preset values (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
119
7. Menu Display and Settings: File Menu
File >Reference File
Makes settings related to reference file operations.
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
Item
Setting
Description
Save Reference(SD
Card)
Execute/Cancel
Stores the preset values of reference file
target menu items to an SD card (execute by
selecting [Execute]).
Lens Center H
–40 to ±0 to +40
Sets the horizontal position of the center
marker in the lens file.
Lens Center V
–40 to ±0 to +40
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the
file ID of reference files.
Sets the vertical position of the center marker
in the lens file.
R Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R flare level in the lens file.
G Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the G flare level in the lens file.
B Flare
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B flare level in the lens file.
File ID
File >Lens File
Makes settings related to lens file operations.
Item
Setting
Description
White Offset R
–99 to ±0 to +99
Display Mode
Model Name/Lens ID
Selects the items to display in the list box that
appears when saving or loading a file.
Sets the white balance offset R channel
correction value for the lens in the lens file.
White Offset B
–99 to ±0 to +99
Recall Internal
Memory
Displays a screen for recalling lens files from
internal memory.
Sets the white balance offset B channel
correction value for the lens in the lens file.
Shading Ch Select
Red/Green/Blue
Store Internal
Memory
Displays a screen for storing lens files in
internal memory.
Selects the target for white shading
correction.
Shading H SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading lens files from
an SD card.
Sets the SAW white shading correction value
in the horizontal direction in the lens file.
Shading H PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Save SD Card
Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an
SD card.
Sets the parabola white shading correction
value in the horizontal direction in the lens
file.
File ID
Displays a screen for displaying/editing the
file ID of lens files.
Shading V SAW
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW white shading correction value
in the vertical direction in the lens file.
Displays the number of the selected file.
Shading V PARA
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the parabola white shading correction
value in the vertical direction in the lens file.
File Source
Clear Lens Offset
Execute/Cancel
Clears the lens file (execute by selecting
Execute).
Lens Auto Recall
Off/On(Lens Name)/
On(Serial Number)
Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file
when a lens that supports serial
communication is attached.
Lens Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the attached
lens (lenses that support serial
communication only).
Lens Name
Displays the model name of the attached lens
(lenses that support serial communication
only).
Lens Manufacturer
Displays the name of the manufacturer of the
attached lens (lenses that support serial
communication only).
Master V Modulation
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the SAW shading correction value in the
vertical direction in the lens file.
File >User Gamma
Makes settings related to user gamma.
Item
Setting
Description
Current Settings
Displays a list screen of the current user
gamma file settings (file names).
Load SD Card
Displays a screen for loading User Gamma
settings from an SD card.
Reset
1/2/3/4/5/All
Resets the settings in the selected user
gamma file (execute by selecting Execute).
Select All to reset all user gamma files.
120
7. Menu Display and Settings
Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions
to the ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the
RET button on the lens.
The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from
the factory.
Switch or button
Function
Assignable Switch setting
ASSIGN. 0 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 1 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 2 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGN. 3 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 4 switch
No assignment
Off
ASSIGNABLE 5 switch
No assignment
Off
RET button
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
Lens RET
ONLINE button
Auto transfer proxy clip
Network Client Mode
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
–
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Setting retained
ATW Hold
Holds the white balance setting in the ATW
(auto-tracking white balance) mode
–
Picture Cache Rec
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Setting retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
being recorded or played.
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch
[Note]
Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the
switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2
switch or power the camcorder off and on again.
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
Off
No assignment
Front Mic
Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is
connected.
Marker
Picture Cache Rec
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
1)
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Rec Source
Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and
external input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the
switch takes effect after recording or playback ends.)
TX Power Save
Switches the wireless transmitter power saving mode.
1) When Picture Cache Rec is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set.
121
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the
ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Zoom Wide/Tele
–
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
When a lens that supports serial
communication is installed, assigns the Zoom
Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns
the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
Off
No assignment
–
[Note]
Front Mic
Switches between stereo (On) and monaural
Setting retained
(Off) when a stereo microphone is connected.
Marker
Turns the display of all markers on/off.
Setting retained
Last Clip Delete
Deletes the last recorded clip.
–
ATW
Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode
on/off.
Do not modify the assignment during independent
proxy recording.
Manual Focus Assist
Turns the manual focus assist function on/off. Setting retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Zebra
Turns zebra display on/off.
Setting not retained
Lens RET
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
–
Hold the white balance setting in the ATW
mode.
–
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
Turbo Gain
Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting
of Operation >Gain Switch >Gain <Turbo>.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
–
Clip Flag NG
Setting not retained
Rec
Starts or stops recording.
–
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
NFC
Executes the NFC function.
–
Clip Flag Keep
Network Client Mode
Turns network client mode on/off.
Setting retained
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
being recorded or played.
Streaming
Turns streaming transmission on/off.
Setting not retained
Color Temp SW 3200K
Setting retained
Auto Upload(Proxy)
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset
value.
Picture Cache Rec
Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off.
Setting retained
Color Temp SW 4300K
Setting retained
Spotlight
Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode
on/off.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 4300K preset
value.
Color Temp SW 5600K
Setting retained
Backlight
Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode
on/off.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 5600K preset
value.
Color Temp SW 6300K
Setting retained
Video Signal Monitor
Switches the video signal monitor display
function.
Setting retained
Adjusts white balance using 6300K preset
value.
Lens Info
Switches the depth of field indication
between off, displayed in meters, and
displayed in feet.
Setting retained
Zoom Tele/Wide
When a lens that supports serial
communication is installed, assigns the Zoom
Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns
the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5
(displayed only when <4> and <5> are set).
–
ATW Hold
[Note]
Do not modify the assignment during independent
proxy recording.
122
7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Electrical CC
Function that switches the electrical CC filter
(3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to
white balance adjustment values.
Sequence with each press of the switch/
button:
3200K4300K5600K6300K
Can be changed using menu settings
(Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>).
Setting retained
Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens
Assignable Switch
setting
Function
State when camcorder is
next powered on
Off
No assignment
–
Lens RET
Rec Review (if playback is allowed)
–
Rec Review
Executes recording review.
–
Shot Mark1
Writes Shot Mark1.
–
[Note]
Shot Mark2
Writes Shot Mark2.
–
This function is not available when Maintenance
>White Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is
set to On.
If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the
function, the assignable switch ceases to function.
Clip Flag OK
Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
Clip Flag NG
Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip
being recorded or played.
Setting not retained
CC5600K
Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white
balance adjustment values.
Setting retained
Clip Flag Keep
Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip Setting not retained
being recorded or played.
Clip Continuous Rec
Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off.
Setting not retained
Focus Magnifier
Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained
Slow & Quick Motion
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off.
Setting retained
XAVC Proxy Rec Start
Starts/stops proxy recording.
Slot Select
When recording media is loaded in both card
slots A and B, selects the card you want to
use.
–
Gamma Display Assist
TX Power Save
Switches the wireless transmitter power
saving mode.
Setting not retained
Setting not retained
Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG
when HLG is configured or for S-Log3 when
S-Log3 is configured.
XAVC Proxy Rec Mode
Turns the proxy data recording function on/
off.
Setting retained
XAVC Proxy Rec Start
Starts/stops proxy recording.
Setting not retained
Gamma Display Assist
Setting not retained
Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG
when HLG is configured or for S-Log3 when
S-Log3 is configured.
[Note]
Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
HD (Sub) P/B Mode
Turns subclip playback mode on/off.
Setting retained
[Note]
Not available in SDR mode or during playback.
Setting not retained
123
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Configuration Data
You can save setup menu settings in the
camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards.
This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate
set of menu settings for the current situation.
To save setup data on an SD card, insert a
writable SD card (page 30) into the UTILITY
SD card slot before proceeding.
For details about the settings saved in
each file, see “Items Saved in User Data”
(page 151).
User Files
Inserting an SD card (for saving
configuration data)
ALL Files
1 Open the switch cover.
ALL files save the configuration data of all
menus. You can save up to 64 files on an SD
card.
2 Insert the SD card (for saving
configuration data) in the UTILITY SD card
slot.
User files save the setting items and data of
the customizable User menu. You can save
up to 64 files on an SD card. By loading this
file into the camcorder memory, you can
customize the setup of the User menu.
[Note]
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other
data that requires adjustment for the specific device) is
not saved.
3 Close the switch cover.
Ejecting an SD card (for saving
configuration data)
1 Open the switch cover.
2 Press the SD card in slightly, then remove
the card.
[Notes]
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is
removed while the SD is being accessed, the integrity
of data on the card cannot be guaranteed. All data
recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make
sure the ACCESS indicator is off before turning off the
camcorder or removing the SD card.
ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out
when inserting/ejecting the card.
The following user data is supported.
Scene Files
Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu
items for the purpose of shooting a particular
scene. You can save up to five files in the
camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64
files on an SD card.
Scene files allow you to save the following
types of data.
ˎˎValues set in the Paint menu
ˎˎShutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS
mode
ˎˎWhite balance data
The data that is saved and loaded depends
on the setting of File >Scene File >Scene
White Data in the setup menu.
Scene files can be stored in internal memory
on the camcorder or on an SD card.
Scene files can also be loaded into the
camcorder.
Reference Files
Reference files save the scene file standard
settings (when File ID is Standard). You can
save one file in the camcorder’s internal
memory and one file on an SD card.
Lens Files
You can set the following data for correcting
for the lens characteristics, and save the data
as a lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in
the camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64
lens files on an SD card.
Configuration data
Sub-items
V modulation shading
correction values
M V Modulation
Center marker position
Lens Center H
Lens Center V
Flare level
R Flare
G Flare
B Flare
White balance correction
value
White Offset R
White Offset B
White shading correction
value
Shading Ch Select
Shading H SAW
Shading H PARA
Shading V SAW
Shading V PARA
Gamma Files
You can save up to five user-defined gamma
table data files (User Gamma Data File) in
internal memory.
124
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
User Files
Saving a User File
Loading a User File
1 Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the 1 Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
A screen for selecting a user file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of
“No File.” Selecting a row with a specified
File ID name will overwrite the selected
file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
you can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >User File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done],
then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
setup menu.
A user file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
125
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
ALL Files
Saving Configuration Data as an
ALL File
1 Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the
setup menu.
A screen for selecting an ALL file save
destination appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of
“No File.” Selecting a row with a specified
File ID name will overwrite the selected
file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
you can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
[Note]
The current values and preset values are stored in an
ALL file.
If an error message appears
One of the following error messages may
appear during execution of the save, or as
soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the
file is not saved.
Error
message
Problem
Solution
File Access
NG
No recordable
media is
inserted.
Insert
recordable
media.
Changing the File ID
If an error message appears
1 Select File >All File >File ID in the setup
One of the following error messages may
appear during execution of the load, or as
soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the
file is not loaded.
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done],
then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Error
message
Problem
Solution
File Access
NG
There is no
readable media
The specified
file does not
exist on the
media
Insert the
media that
contains the file
you want.
Loading Configuration Data
1 Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
An ALL file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the current
values and preset values saved in the camcorder’s
internal memory are overwritten.
ˎˎ Do not load a file on a device that is an older version
than the device from which the file was saved. Doing
so could cause a malfunction.
ˎˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading
configuration data.
Restoring All Current Settings to
Preset Values
In this document, initial setup menu settings
configured/saved by the user are referred to
as “preset values.”
Even after loading files to set up the
camcorder, and overwriting original files with
new settings, you can reset the contents of
the files by recovering the preset values.
1 Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup
menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Saving All Current Settings as
Preset Values
1 Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
Resetting Current Settings and
Preset Values to Factory Default
Settings
1 Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the
setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
[Note]
The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing.
126
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Scene Files
Saving a Scene File in Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Store Internal
Memory in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
If the File ID is set to “Standard”
destination, preconfigured standard
settings are saved.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
The scene file is saved, overwriting any
existing file, in the selected destination.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Saving a Scene File on an SD Card
1 Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in
the setup menu.
A scene file save destination screen
appears.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done],
then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
Loading a Scene File from Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal
Memory in the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of
“No File.” Selecting a row with a specified
File ID name will overwrite the selected
file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
you can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Load a Scene File from an SD Card
1 Select File >Scene File >Load SD Card in
the setup menu.
A scene file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
127
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Reference Files
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values
Loading a Reference File from an
SD Card
1 Select File >Reference File >Store
1 Select File >Reference File >Load
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
Saving Current Settings as Preset
Values on an SD Card
Resetting Current Settings and
Preset Values to Factory Default
Settings
Reference in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
then press the knob.
1 Select File >Reference File >Save
Reference(SD Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Reference(SD Card) in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
then press the knob.
1 Select File >Reference File >Clear
Reference in the setup menu.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Reference File >File ID in the
setup menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done],
then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
128
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Lens Files
Saving a Lens File in Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >Store Internal
Memory in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with File ID of
“No offset.” Selecting a row with a
specified File ID name will overwrite the
selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
you can modify it.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute]
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Changing the File ID
1 Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the
setup menu.
A lens file save destination screen
appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a
destination, then press the knob.
You can save files in rows with a File ID of
“No File.” Selecting a row with a specified
File ID name will overwrite the selected
file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
you can modify it.
1 Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the
setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
1 Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
2 Select characters and enter the File ID.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
menu.
A screen for editing the File ID appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done],
then press the knob.
The File ID is updated.
on the confirmation message screen, then
press the knob.
Saving a Lens File on an SD Card
Loading a Lens File from an SD
Card
Loading a Lens File from Internal
Memory
1 Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal
Memory in the setup menu.
A lens file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
then press the knob.
Loading a Lens File Automatically
When you are using a lens that supports serial
communication, you can set up the camcorder
by automatically loading the lens file that
corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto
Recall function).
To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File
>Lens File >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu
to one of the following.
Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function.
On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name.
On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that
corresponds to the lens model name and
serial number (when the lens supports
communication of the serial number).
If the lens does not support communication of
the serial number, even when set to On (Serial
Number), load the lens file that corresponds to
the lens model name.
129
8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data
Gamma Files
Checking the Current Gamma File
Settings (File Names)
Using User Gamma Files Created
Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3
Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings
in the setup menu to display a list of the
currently configured user gamma files.
Save created user gamma files to be loaded in
the “PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM”
directory of the SD card.
Loading a User Gamma File from
an SD Card
Resetting a User Gamma File to
Initial State
1 Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in 1 Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the
the setup menu.
A user gamma file list screen appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to
load, then press the knob.
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
setup menu.
A gamma file number reset screen
appears.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select the number
of the gamma file to reset (1 to 5).
To reset all gamma files, select [All].
A confirmation screen appears.
3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
130
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit,
RCP-1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other
control unit is connected, some camcorder
functions can be controlled from that unit.
Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Using a remote control cable, connect
between the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the
camcorder and the camera connector of the
remote control unit.
When you turn on the camcorder after making
the connection, the camcorder enters remote
control mode, enabling menu operations and
shooting operations.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB
connection to the camcorder is enabled.
ˎˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled
during remote control, remote control mode is
released.
ˎˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit
when the camcorder is on.
ˎˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Panel.
ˎˎ If Detail is adjusted using the RM-B170, only the HD
Detail changes.
ˎˎ Perform QFHD Detail adjustments using Detail(QFHD)
in the Paint menu.
The following switches of the camcorder
are disabled when a remote control unit is
connected.
ˎˎGAIN switch
ˎˎWHITE BAL switch
ˎˎAUTO W/B BAL switch
ˎˎSHUTTER switch
ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch
ˎˎASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5
switches, and the ONLINE button to which
the Turbo Gain or ATW function has been
assigned
Releasing Remote Control Mode
Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the
remote control unit.
The switch settings on the camcorder become
enabled.
Image Quality Adjustment when
an RM-B170 is Connected
When the RM-B170 is connected, the
parameters for camera image quality
adjustment items (paint data) are set to the
parameters that were specified the last time
that the RM-B170 was connected.
Function of Recording Start/Stop
Buttons when an RM-B170 is
Connected
Set the function of the buttons using
Maintenance >Camera Config >RM Rec Start in
the setup menu.
The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec
Start settings are given below.
Button
RM Rec Start setting
RM
Camcorder REC
START button
Camera
PARA
Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled
Enabled
Button
RM Rec Start setting
RM
Camera
Disabled Enabled
ASSIGN. 1/3
switches,
ASSIGNABLE 4/5
switches, and
ONLINE button
assigned with
recording start/
stop function
RM-B170 MEDIA
START button
Enabled
PARA
Camcorder setup menu
RM-B170
Main data block
Remote control data
block
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
Data Structure of Image Quality
Adjustment Data
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder
used for storing camera image quality
adjustment data (paint data) consists of the
two regions shown below: a “main data block”
that is used when a remote control unit is
not connected, and a “remote control data
block” that is used when a remote control
unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is
automatically selected and output to the
camera section depending on whether or not
a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is
connected.
Camcorder non-volatile memory
Camera unit hardware
RM-B170 connected
RM-B170 not connected
When a remote control unit is connected, the
“remote control data block” is selected as
the current paint data block, and the paint
adjustment parameters that were in effect the
last time the remote control unit was used are
loaded.
However, when the settings of absolute value
controls 1) and absolute value switches 2) are
set on the remote control unit, the settings on
the remote control unit override the settings
on the camcorder.
When the remote control unit is disconnected
from the camcorder, the “main data block” is
re-enabled, and the camcorder returns to the
settings that were in effect before the remote
control unit was connected.
1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the
angular position of the control is output. Controls for
which data corresponding to the amount of rotation
is output are called relative value controls.
2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such
as toggle switches or slide switches (except most
momentary switches) whose positions must coincide
with their functions are called absolute value
switches.
131
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM
Common Memory in the setup menu is set
to [On], you can use settings of the paint
adjustment data stored in the main data block
even if a remote control unit is connected.
In this case, the settings stored in the main
data block will be updated when you change
the settings on the remote control unit. Thus,
the settings of the paint data made with the
remote control unit will be retained even after
the remote control unit is removed. However,
if the switch position on the remote control
unit differs from the one on the camcorder,
the switch position on the camcorder takes
precedence.
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that
are in effect before you connect the remote
control unit. In this case, you must set the
control knobs to relative value mode on the
remote control unit.
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with
the remote control unit.
Operating the Menu from the
RM‑B170
1 Press the CHARACTER button on the
RM-B170, turning it on, then press the
MENU button.
The menu is displayed on the monitor
connected to the MONITOR connector of
the RM-B170.
2 Select and set menu items using the
adjustment knob and CANCEL/ENTER
button.
3 When finished, set the MENU button to
OFF to exit the menu.
For details about RM-B170 operation, refer to the
operation manual of the RM-B170.
132
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Major Functions Supported on the RCP-1001/1501, RM-B170
Table legend
Signal support is indicated by the following.
Yes: Available
–: Not available
Item
Sub-item
Settings
Function
RCP-1001
RCP-1501
Panel Active
Panel Active
On/Off
Turns panel operation on/off.
Yes
Yes
RM-B170
Yes
Bars
Bars
On/Off
Turns color bar output on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Call
Call
On/Off
Calls camcorder from RCP/RM.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Standard
Standard
On/Off
Turns standard mode on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
ND Filter
ND Filter
1/2/3/4
Displays the selected ND filter.
Yes
Yes
Yes
CC Filter
CC Filter
A/B/C/D
Displays the selected CC filter.
–
–
–
Gain
Step Gain
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42dB
Master gain setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
White Balance
AWB
Start/Stop
Starts auto white balance.
During execution, this stops auto white balance.
Yes
Yes
Yes
White Memory
A/B/PRESET
Switches the white balance preset memory.
Yes
Yes
Yes
ATW
On/Off
Turns ATW on/off.
Yes 1)
Yes
Yes 1)
5600K
On/Off
Turns electrical color temperature conversion on/off.
Yes
Yes
Yes 1)
Black
ABB
Start/Stop
Starts black balance auto adjustment.
During execution, this stops black balance.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Knee
Point
75% to 90% to 109%
Sets the knee point.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Detail
Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the QFHD or HD detail level.
Yes
Yes 3)
Shutter
Iris
Yes
3)
3)
Shutter Setting
On/Off
Turns the shutter on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Shutter Speed
–
Sets the shutter speed.
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
ECS Setting
On/Off
Turns ECS mode on/off.
–
Yes
ECS Frequency
–
Sets the ECS mode frequency.
–
Yes
Yes
SLS Setting
On/Off
Turns SLS mode on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
SLS Speed
–
Sets the SLS mode speed (number of frames)
–
Yes
Yes
Iris Mode
Auto/Manual
Sets the iris mode.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Iris Level
–99 to ±0 to +99
Adjusts the auto iris target level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Close
On/Off
Turns iris control closing on/off.
Yes
Yes
–
133
9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit
Item
Sub-item
Settings
Function
Switch Status
Gamma
On/Off
Turns the gamma correction function on/off.
RCP-1001
RCP-1501
RM-B170
–
Yes
Black Gamma
On/Off
Turns the black gamma correction function on/off.
Yes 1)
Yes 1)
Yes
Matrix
On/Off
Yes 1)
Turns the matrix function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 2)
Knee
On/Off
Turns the knee correction function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
White Clip
On/Off
Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 2)
Detail(QFHD)
On/Off
Turns the QFHD detail adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Detail(HD)
On/Off
Turns the HD detail adjustment function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes
Flare
On/Off
Turns the flare correction function on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
Test Saw
On/Off
Turns the test signal on/off.
–
Yes
Yes 1)
White
R Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance R gain value.
Yes
Yes
Yes
B Gain
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the white balance B gain value.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Black
Master Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the master black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Camcorder Menu
Media
Shot Mark
R Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the R channel black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
B Black
–99 to ±0 to +99
Sets the B channel black level.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Menu
On/Off
Displays the camcorder menu.
Cancel/Preset
Cancel/Preset
–
–
Yes
–
–
Yes
Select/Set
Select(Up/Down)/Set
–
–
Yes
Rec
Start/Stop
Starts/stops recording.
–
–
Yes
Yes
Play
Play/Pause
Starts playback.
–
–
FREV
–
Fast reverse playback
–
–
Yes
FFWD
–
Fast forward playback
–
–
Yes
STOP
–
Stops playback.
–
–
Yes
Rec Review
–
Starts recording review.
–
–
Yes
PREV
–
Jumps to the start of the current clip.
–
–
Yes
NEXT
–
Jumps to the start of the next clip.
–
–
Yes
Shot Mark1
–
Sets shot mark 1.
–
–
Yes
Shot Mark2
–
Sets shot mark 2.
–
–
Yes 1)
ZOOM
–
–
Zoom operation (with compatible lens)
–
–
Yes 1)
FOCUS
–
–
Focus operation (with compatible lens)
–
–
Yes 1)
1) Operation supported when the function is assigned to an assignable switch on the RCP/RM.
2) Camcorder menu operation supported from the RM.
3) You can control the QFHD or HD detail, according to the setting of Maintenance >Camera Config >Detail Control(RM/RCP) in the setup menu.
134
9. Connecting External Devices
Connecting an External Monitor
Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected.
BNC cable (not supplied)
High-speed HDMI cable (not
supplied)
Regardless of whether the signal is 4K or HD,
the same status information and menus can
be displayed on the external monitor as those
on the viewfinder screen.
SDI OUT Connector (BNC)
The SDI OUT connector can be used to
connect a device that supports SDI. The device
type can be a monitor, switcher, VTR, or other
recording device.
The output signal from this connector can be
turned on and off using Operation >Input/
Output >SDI Out1 Output/SDI Out2 Output in
the setup menu (page 94).
For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied).
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A
Connector)
You can turn the output signal from the
camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/
Output >HDMI Output in the setup menu.
The output signal format is set using
Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in
the setup menu.
Use a commercially available high-speed
HDMI cable for connection.
135
9. Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
The clips recorded on SxS memory cards
with this camcorder can be controlled on a
computer or edited using optional nonlinear
editing software.
You can copy clips on SxS memory cards
to portable storage or other USB media if
portable media/USB media is connected to
the external device connection connector.
[Note]
Copying is not supported when the file system is set to
UDF.
USB Connection with a Computer
When you connect the camcorder to a
computer using a USB cable (not supplied),
the memory card in the slot is recognized as
an extended drive by the computer.
When two memory cards are mounted
in the camcorder, they are recognized as
two independent extended drives by the
computer.
USB cable
(not supplied)
[Notes]
ˎˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and
information are displayed on the screen, then connect
the USB cable to the camcorder.
ˎˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be
careful to check the form and direction of the USB
connector.
ˎˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from
the computer.
To start USB connection
it. The message “Connect USB Now?” appears
again.
To remove an SxS memory card
On Windows
When you connect a computer to the PC
connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the
message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to
prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable
the USB connection.
If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the
ESCAPE position, or if you disconnect the
USB cable, the message “Connect USB Now?”
disappears.
If you select “Execute” and press the MENU
knob, the USB connection is enabled and the
camcorder is recognized as an extension drive.
If the USB connection is enabled during
recording/playback operation, the operation
is stopped and the message “USB Connecting”
appears on the viewfinder screen.
At this time, the output signal from the SDI
OUT 1/2 connectors changes to a black signal.
1 Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware”
[Notes]
ˎˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording,
playback, and so on while the message “USB
Connecting” is displayed.
ˎˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in
the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following
operations.
‒‒ Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/
off, switching the operating mode, etc.)
‒‒ Removing or loading a media from an active slot
(being accessed from the computer)
‒‒ Removing or connecting the USB cable
To copy clips to the local disk of your
computer, the dedicated application software
must be downloaded and installed on your
computer. For details about downloading
software, see “Software Downloads”
(page 168).
Although the data regarding recorded
materials are stored over multiple files and
folders, you can easily handle the clips without
considering such data and directory structure
by using the dedicated application software.
Releasing the USB connection
[Note]
To release the USB connection, follow the
same procedure as that for removing a device
from the computer.
To enable the USB connection again, first
disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect
icon on the task bar of the computer.
2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card
- Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu.
3 Check that the “Safe To Remove
Hardware” message appears, then
remove the card.
To use a nonlinear editing system
In a nonlinear editing system, editing software
(option) that supports the formats recorded by
the camcorder is required.
Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of
your computer in advance, using the supplied
application software.
Some editing software may not operate
properly. Be sure to confirm before use that it
conforms to the recording formats used with
this camcorder.
Connecting Portable Storage/USB
Media
On Macintosh
Drag the SxS memory card icon on the
desktop to the Trash.
If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the
Finder, click on the eject icon.
To use the application software
If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the
clips on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows)
or Finder (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by
the clips may not be maintained.
When portable storage, USB HDD, or similar
media is connected to the external device
connection connector, you can copy clips from
the recording media inserted in an SxS card
slot of the camcorder to USB media.
1 Specify the destination folder for copying
clips in Operation >USB >Select Folder in
the setup menu.
You can also select [New] on the screen to
create a new folder.
[Note]
If a folder is not specified, a folder is automatically
created with a folder name the same as the
creation date of the first clip to be copied, and clips
are copied to that folder.
2 Select Operation >USB >Copy to USB in
the setup menu.
3 Select the slot in which the target
recording media is inserted.
Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A.
136
9. Connecting External Devices: Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer
Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot B.
Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the
recording media inserted in slot A and
slot B.
[Note]
When a copy destination folder is specified in step
1 and Media(A)(B) to USB is selected, slot A clips
are copied to the specified destination folder. Slot
B clips are copied to a folder that is automatically
created with a folder name the same as the
creation date of the first clip.
4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
All clips on the target recording media are
copied to the USB media.
[Note]
If a clip with the same file name as the clip to copy
already exists in the destination folder, the clip is
not copied.
Displaying a list of clips on portable
storage/USB media
You can display a list of the clips on portable
storage/USB media using Operation >USB
>View Clip List in the setup menu.
Renaming a folder on portable storage/
USB media
You can rename a folder using Operation >USB
>Rename Folder in the setup menu.
1 Select Operation >USB >Rename Folder in
the setup menu.
2 Select the folder to rename, and press the
SET button.
A file name input screen appears.
3 Enter a folder name, and select [Done] on
under the following conditions, even when
performing an operation in Operation >USB in
the setup menu. To start the supply of power,
perform the solution shown in the table.
Checking for copy read errors
State
Solution
You can check for read errors after writing
clips by setting Operation >USB >Error Check
in the setup menu to On.
During clip recording,
playback, thumbnail
display, proxy recording,
streaming, proxy transfer,
or live transfer mode
Terminate the
previous
operation.
Formatting portable storage/USB media
Network Client Mode is On
Set Network Client
Mode to Off.
You can format portable storage/USB media
in exFAT format using Operation >USB >Format
USB in the setup menu.
Camera adaptor is
connected a)
Unmount the
camera adaptor
connection.
the screen.
The folder is renamed.
1 Select Operation >USB >Format USB in the
setup menu.
2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute],
then press the knob.
Initialization (formatting) begins.
3 When the formatting is completed, a
message appears on the screen. Select
[OK].
Checking free space on portable
storage/USB media
The free space on portable storage/USB
media is displayed in the Media Remain row
on the screen displayed when Operation >USB
in the setup menu is selected.
About power supply to portable
storage/USB media
Power is supplied to portable storage/USB
media from the external device connector
automatically when performing an operation
in Operation >USB in the setup menu.
However, power supply is not started
a) Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the
Japanese model only.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Clips on portable storage or other USB media cannot
be copied to recording media inserted in an SxS card
slot.
ˎˎ Clips cannot be recorded while power is supplied to
the external device connector. To start recording clips,
terminate the Operation >USB operation in the setup
menu.
137
9. Connecting External Devices
Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 a) HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera
Control Unit (CCU).
This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders
with camera extension units connected to a remote control unit.
a) Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the Japanese model only.
Tally and Call Indicators
The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows.
Data received from system
HDVF LED indicators
For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals.
Text display on viewfinder
screen
[Notes]
Tally
Green
Tally
CA call
Non-CA
call
REC/
TALLY
LED
GREEN
TALLY
LED


CALL
ˎˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder.
ˎˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
ˎˎ Not supported in the return video display by the camcorder.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
No
display
No
display
No
display
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Lit
Not lit

No
display
CALL
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Not lit
Not lit
No
display
No
display
CALL
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Lit
Not lit

No
display
CALL
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No
display

No
display
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Lit
Lit


CALL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Not lit
Lit
No
display

CALL
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Lit
Lit


CALL
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Lit
Not lit

No
display
No
display
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No
display
No
display
CALL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Lit
Not lit

No
display
CALL
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Not lit
Not lit
No
display
No
display
CALL
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Lit
Lit


No
display
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Not lit
Lit
No
display

CALL
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Lit
Lit


CALL
ON
ON
ON
ON
Not lit
Lit
No
display

CALL
[Note]
Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera
Adaptor is connected.
138
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems
The supported formats of a shooting/recording system comprising the camcorder, camera
adaptor a), and camera control unit are shown in the following table.
a) Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the Japanese model only.
Operation menu
Format
Frequency
Input/Output
Rec Format
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Output Format
Camcorder
limitation
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
No
No
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
1920×1080i
1920×1080 50i
No
1920×1080i
1920×1080 50i
No
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
No
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080P
XAVC-L 25 1080i
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
HD422 50 1080i
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
XAVC-L 35 1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
XAVC-L 25 1080i
SP 1440×1080i
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
No
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080 29.97PsF a)
1920×1080 59.94i
No
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
HD422 50 1080i
HQ 1920×1080i
HQ 1440×1080i
SP 1440×1080i
HD 422 50 720P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
HQ 1280×720P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
1280×720 59.94P
Return video
display
XAVC-L 200 2160P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
1280×720P
(2-3PD)
Output Format
SDI
50
XAVC-L 35 1080P
29.97
HD422 50 720P
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
HD 422 50 720P
No
23.98
XAVC-L 200 2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
1920×1080 59.94i
Rec Format
No
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
1920×1080i
(2-3PD)
Input/Output
Frequency
Return video
display
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
Camcorder
limitation
Format
SDI
59.94
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Operation menu
1280×720P
1280×720 59.94P
No
139
9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System
System format of
camera adaptor /
camera control unit
Camcorder
limitation
1920×1080PsF
1920×1080 25PsF a)
1920×1080 50i
No
1280×720P
1280×720 50P
No
Operation menu
Format
Input/Output
Frequency
Rec Format
25
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
Output Format
Return video
display
SDI
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P
XAVC-L 35 1080P
HD422 50 1080P
HQ 1920×1080P
HD422 50 720P
a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected. Connection of a camera adaptor is
supported on the Japanese model only.
[Note]
In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick
Motion, cannot be used simultaneously.
140
9. Connecting External Devices
Recording External Input Signals
You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder.
To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output
>Source Select in the setup menu to [External].
HD/SD
Operation >Format >Rec
Operation >Format
Format in the setup menu >Frequency in the setup
menu
Supported external input signal
formats
HD
HQ 1440×1080i
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
[Notes]
ˎˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as
Slow & Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output
>Source Select in the setup menu to [External].
ˎˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback,
Rec Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set
to [External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input.
ˎˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes
when the input signal returns to normal.
ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function.
Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording
Formats
HD/SD
Operation >Format >Rec
Operation >Format
Format in the setup menu >Frequency in the setup
menu
Supported external input signal
formats
HD
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
59.94
HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i
HD 1280×720 59.94P
50
HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i
HD 1280×720 50P
XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i
HD422 50 1080i
HD422 50 720P
HQ 1920×1080i
SP 1440×1080i
HQ 1280×720P
141
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Maintenance
Cleaning the Viewfinder
Note about the Battery Terminals
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and
mirror inside the viewfinder barrel.
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a
commercially available lens cleaner.
The battery terminal of this unit (the connector
for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a
consumable part.
Power may not be supplied to the unit
properly if the pins of the battery terminal are
bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or
if they become corroded due to prolonged
outdoor use.
Periodic inspections are recommended to
keep the unit working properly and to prolong
its usable lifetime.
Contact a Sony service or sales representative
for more information about inspections.
[Note]
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.
Exchanging the Battery of the
Internal Clock
The camcorder’s internal clock is powered
by a lithium battery. If the message “BackUp
Battery End” appears in the viewfinder, this
battery must be exchanged. Contact a Sony
service representative.
142
10. Maintenance and Inspection
Error/Warning System
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning
sound is emitted.
You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible.
Error Display
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs.
Error message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
E + error code
Continuous
High-speed flashing Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC
supply.)
If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative.
–
Cause and Solution
Warning Display
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Warning message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Cause and Solution
Media Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card.
Replace immediately.
Battery Near End
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
Battery End
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing The battery pack is dead.
Recording is disabled.
Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the
camcorder.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Temperature High
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The internal temperature is high.
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again.
Voltage Low
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The DC IN voltage is low (level 1).
Check the power source.
The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low.
Recharge at the earliest convenience.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
143
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Warning message
Warning sound WARNING
indicator
Tally/REC indicator
Insufficient Voltage
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2).
Recording is disabled.
Connect a different power source.
(The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.)
Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying
more clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Last Clip Recording
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached.
Prepare a new SxS memory card.
Clips Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Media(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace
immediately.
Clips(Proxy) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more
clips is not possible. Replace immediately.
Media(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
Last Clip(Proxy) Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been
reached.
Prepare a new proxy data SD card.
Clips(Proxy) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest
convenience.
Media(A)1) Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Clips Full
Continuous
On
High-speed flashing When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Near Full
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
Media(A)1) Last Clip Rec
Intermittent
Flashing
Flashing
When using the 2-slot Simul Rec function
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
Cause and Solution
144
10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System
Caution and Operation Confirmation Display
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow
the instructions provided to resolve the issue.
Display indication
Cause and Solution
Battery Error
Please Change Battery
An error was detected in the battery pack.
Replace with a normal battery pack.
Backup Battery End
Please Change
The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient.
Replace the backup battery.
Unknown Media(A)1)
Please Change
ˎˎA memory card that has been partitioned or a memory
card containing more clips that can be handled by the
camcorder was inserted.
ˎˎAn SxS card was inserted when the file system is set to
FAT.
ˎˎAn SDHC card was inserted when the file system is set to
exFAT or UDF.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Media Error
Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored
An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must
be restored.
Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card.
Media Error
Cannot Record to Media(A)1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be
used for recording.
Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing
the memory card is recommended.
Media Error
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be
used for recording or playback.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced.
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Unsupported File System
A card using a different file system or an unformatted card
was inserted.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be
replaced or formatted using the camcorder.
Media(A)1) Error
Playback Halted
Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while
reading from the memory card.
If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the
memory card.
Media(A)1) Error
Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the
memory card.
If the problem persists, replace the memory card.
Display indication
Cause and Solution
Different Media is Inserted
Cannot Use Media(A)1)
Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and
insert a card of the same type as the previously inserted
card.
1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B.
145
11. Appendix
Messages Displayed During Operation
This section describes the meaning of messages that may be displayed in response to button, switch, or knob operation.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Covers only the messages displayed about possible causes in response to an operation.
ˎˎ Messages displayed when an operation is attempted while a menu item cannot be selected (grayed out) are not described.
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
REC button was pressed
Media not exist
Cannot record because there is no recording media in an SxS card slot.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Proxy data recording mode is set to On, but cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
Assignable switch assigned with XAVC Proxy Media(Proxy)
Rec Start was operated
Cannot Record
No Media in Slot(Proxy)
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy) Error
Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
Media(Proxy): Write Protected
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected.
Media(Proxy)
Cannot Record
NG: Preparing
Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed.
PREV button was pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
F REV button was pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PREV + F REV buttons were pressed
First Clip Top!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip.
PLAY button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
F FWD button was pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
NEXT + F FWD buttons were pressed
Last Clip End!
Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip.
Media slot was changed
Cannot Switch Slots
Cannot change slots during playback.
Recording media was removed
Media removed
Media was removing while reading from recording media or while writing to recording media (ACCESS indicator is
lit).
146
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
GAIN switch was operated
Gain: xxdB
(where “xx” is the gain value)
Gain setting was changed.
DCC switch was operated
DCC: On
DCC was set to On.
DCC: Off
DCC was set to Off.
Fixed By Hyper Gamma !
Cannot set DCC to On because Gamma Category is set to HG or User.
White: Preset xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the preset value.
White: A xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the memory A value.
White: B xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance was changed to the memory B value.
White: ATW xxxxK
(where “xxxx” is the color temperature value)
White balance mode was changed to ATW.
Shutter: 1/xxxx
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
Shutter speed was changed (standard, Speed mode settings).
Shutter: xxxx
(where “xxxx” is the shutter value)
Shutter speed was changed (standard, Angle mode settings).
ECS: xxxxHz
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
ECS: xxxxHz
(where “xxxx” is the frequency value)
Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode).
Iris Override: +x.xx
(where “x.xx” is a numeric value)
Iris override level was changed.
Color Bars
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Test Saw
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a test signal is being output.
Not Available
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Not Available
Playing back
Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Not Available
Displaying Thumbnails
Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Color Bars
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output.
Not Available
Playing back
Cannot execute because playback is in progress.
Not Available
Displaying Thumbnails
Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed.
White Balance Preset
Cannot execute because the white balance is set to the preset value.
White balance switch was operated
SHUTTER switch was operated
Menu knob was turned
Auto black switch was operated
Auto white switch was operated
147
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with ATW Hold
function was operated
ATW Hold
ATW Hold function was enabled.
ATW Hold Off
ATW Hold function was disabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Clip
Continuous Rec was operated
Cannot Proceed
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
[Note]
Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the Japanese model only.
Assignable switch assigned with Picture
Cache Rec was operated
Cannot Proceed
Recording
Cannot execute because recording is in progress.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎPlayback is in progress
ˎˎThumbnail screen is displayed
ˎˎCA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU.
[Note]
Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the Japanese model only.
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming
was operated
Cannot Proceed
Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Cannot execute because network client mode is enabled.
Cannot Proceed
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot execute because network connection setting is set to Off.
Cannot Proceed
Network Client Mode Setting is "On"
Network Function is Disabled
Network client mode is set to On, but cannot execute because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Start Streaming
Streaming Disabled Temporarily
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎProxy data playback is in progress
ˎˎ1280×720 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1920×1080
ˎˎ1920×1080 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1280×720
Cannot Start Streaming
Please stop Recording or Playback
Cannot execute because recording/playback was started while wireless function circuitry was initializing (including
thumbnail display).
Stop recording/playback (including thumbnail display) to enable execution.
148
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Streaming
was operated while network client mode is
enabled
Cannot Proceed
Streaming Setting is "On"
Cannot configure because streaming is in progress.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
Cannot Record Proxy
Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Proxy Recording will be Stopped
Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM
with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Cannot Record Proxy
ˎˎCannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
ˎˎCannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode
>Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Proxy Recording will be Stopped
ˎˎCannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable.
ˎˎProxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM
with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Invalid User Name or Password
Connection Control Manager authentication error occurred.
Cannot Connect to CCM
Invalid Address or Port Number
Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because the Connection Control Manager address or port number
setting is incorrect.
Assignable switch assigned with Auto
Upload(Proxy) was operated
Cannot Proceed
Network Function is Disabled
Cannot execute because proxy data recording circuitry and wireless function circuitry initialization are not
completed.
ONLINE button was pressed and held
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because wireless function circuitry is switching mode or power supply is switching off.
Assignable switch assigned with Zebra was Zebra: On
operated or ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was Zebra: Off
changed
Zebra was set to On.
ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was operated
Zebra: On
Zebra was set to On.
Zebra: Off
Zebra was set to Off.
Assignable switch assigned with Master was Marker: On
operated
Marker: Off
Marker was set to On.
Assignable switch assigned with Video
Signal Monitor was operated
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are
both set to Off.
OUTPUT switch was moved to the BARS
position (color bar display)
Not Available
S&Q Motion: On
Cannot execute because S&Q motion recording mode is enabled.
ND filter was changed
2: 1/4ND xxxxK
(where “2: 1/4ND” is the ND filter type and
“xxxx” is the color temperature value)
ND filter was changed.
ND:3 CC: x xxxxK
(where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type
and “CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and
color temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
ND filter was changed with ND Filter C.Temp set to Off and Electrical CC assigned to an assignable switch.
Zebra was set to Off.
Marker was set to Off.
149
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Meaning and possible cause
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp Color Temp SW 3200K
SW 3200K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 3200K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp Color Temp SW 4300K
SW 4300K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 4300K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp Color Temp SW 5600K
SW 5600K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 5600K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp Color Temp SW 6300K
SW 6300K was operated
Cannot Proceed
ND Filter C.Temp: On
Color Temp SW 6300K was enabled.
Assignable switch assigned with Electrical
CC was operated
ND:3 CC: x xxxxK
(where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type
and “CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and
color temperature value after electrical color
temperature conversion)
Electrical CC filter was changed.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Assignable switch assigned with CC5600K
was operated
CC 5600K
5600K setting was selected.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎND Filter C.Temp is set to On
ˎˎElectrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, but 5600K is not assigned to Electrical CC.
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark1
was operated
Shot Mark1
(arbitrary character string when defining
planning metadata)
Shot mark 1 was added.
Cannot Record Essence Mark
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Cannot Proceed
Cannot add because of the following conditions.
ˎˎCannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
ˎˎPicture Cache Rec function is set to On
ˎˎInterval Rec recording is in progress
ˎˎMedia is write-protected
ˎˎTarget clip is recorded on an SD card
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On.
150
11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation
Operation
Message
Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark2 Shot Mark2
was operated
(arbitrary character string when defining
planning metadata)
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag
OK was operated
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag
NG was operated
Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag
Keep was operated
Meaning and possible cause
Shot mark 2 was added.
Cannot Record Essence Mark
Reached Essence Mark Limit
Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached.
Cannot Proceed
OK Clip Flag
Cannot add because of the following conditions.
ˎˎCannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected
ˎˎPicture Cache Rec function is set to On
ˎˎInterval Rec recording is in progress
ˎˎMedia is write-protected
ˎˎTarget clip is recorded on an SD card
Clip flag (OK mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (OK mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎMedia is write-protected
ˎˎTarget clip is recorded on an SD card
NG Clip Flag
Clip flag (NG mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (NG mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎMedia is write-protected
ˎˎTarget clip is recorded on an SD card
KEEP Clip Flag
Clip flag (KEEP mark) was added.
Delete Clip Flag
Clip flag (KEEP mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice).
Cannot Proceed
Cannot execute because of the following conditions.
ˎˎMedia is write-protected
ˎˎTarget clip is recorded on an SD card
Recording media to use was changed.
SLOT SELECT button was operated
Switched Slot
An assignable button assigned with Slow &
Quick Motion was operated in a recording
format that does not support Slow & Quick
Motion.
Cannot Proceed
S&Q Unsupported Rec Format
Slow & Quick Motion cannot be used due to unsupported format.
151
11. Appendix
Items Saved in User Data
Table legend
Yes: Saved
Yes*: Saved (not cleared using Clear All Preset)
No: Not saved
–: Not saved (temporary setting)
Default: ‌Not saved in Reference file, but saved as default menu preset when File >Reference in
the setup menu is executed.
Item
Input/Output
User Menu
Super Impose
Item
Sub-item
Edit User Menu
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Yes
No
No
No
LCD
Rec Function
Operation Menu
Item
Format
Base Setting
HDR Setting
Format Media
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Frequency
Yes*
No
No
No
File System
Yes*
No
No
No
Rec Format
Yes
No
No
No
Shooting Mode
Yes
No
No
No
High Sensitivity Mode
Yes
Yes
No
No
4K(QFHD) Rec/Out
Yes
No
No
No
HD Rec/Out
Yes
No
No
No
SDR Gain
Yes
No
No
No
4K(QFHD) Color Space
Yes
No
No
No
HD Color Space
Yes
No
No
No
Media(A)
–
–
–
–
Media(B)
–
–
–
–
SD Card(Utility)
–
–
–
–
SD Card(Proxy)
–
–
–
–
XAVC Proxy Rec
Mode
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Output Format
Yes
No
No
Lens
No
Source Select
Yes
No
No
No
No
SDI Out1 Output
Yes
No
No
SDI Out2 Output
Yes
No
No
No
HDMI Output
Yes
No
No
No
SDI Out/HDMI Super
Yes
No
No
No
Super(VF Display)
Yes
No
No
No
Super(Menu)
Yes
No
No
No
Super(Marker)
Yes
No
No
No
LCD Color
Yes
No
No
No
LCD Marker&Zebra
Yes
No
No
No
Slow & Quick Motion
Yes
No
No
No
Frame Rate
Yes
No
No
No
No
Clip Continuous Rec
Yes
No
No
Picture Cache Rec
Yes
No
No
No
Cache Rec Time
Yes
No
No
No
Interval Rec
No
No
No
No
No
Number of Frames
Yes
No
No
Interval Time
Yes
No
No
No
Pre-Lighting
Yes
No
No
No
Simul Rec
Yes
No
No
No
4K & HD (Sub) Rec
Yes
No
No
No
HD (Sub) Rec Format
Yes
No
No
No
HD (Sub) Playback Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
Size
Yes*
No
No
No
Frame Rate
–
–
–
–
Bit Rate
–
–
–
–
Yes*
No
No
No
Audio Channel
152
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Assignable
Switch
VF Setting
Marker
Gain Switch
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
<0>
Yes
No
No
No
<1>
Yes
No
No
No
Auto Iris
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Iris Override
Yes
No
No
Lens
No
Mode
Yes
No
No
No
No
<2>
Yes
No
No
No
Level
Yes
No
No
<3>
Yes
No
No
No
Speed
Yes
No
No
No
<4>
Yes
No
No
No
Clip High light
Yes
No
No
No
<5>
Yes
No
No
No
Detect Window
Yes
No
No
No
Lens RET
Yes
No
No
No
Detect Window Indication
No
No
No
No
Online
Yes
No
No
No
Iris APL Ratio
Yes
No
No
No
Zoom Speed
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var Width
Yes
No
No
No
Color
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var Height
Yes
No
No
No
VF Detail Level
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var H Position
Yes
No
No
No
Setting
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Var V Position
Yes
No
No
No
Color
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra Select
Yes
No
No
No
Center Marker
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra1 Level
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra
Safety Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra1 Aperture Level
Yes
No
No
No
Safety Area
Yes
No
No
No
Zebra2 Level
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Marker
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Select
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Mask
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Safety Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Aspect Safety Area
Yes
No
No
No
100% Marker
Yes
No
No
No
User Box
Yes
No
No
No
User Box Width
Yes
No
No
No
No
User Box Height
Yes
No
No
User Box H Position
Yes
No
No
No
User Box V Position
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<L>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<M>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain<H>
Yes
No
No
No
Gain <Turbo>
Yes
No
No
No
Shockless Gain
Yes
No
No
No
153
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Display On/Off
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Video Level Warning
Yes
No
No
No
Shutter Setting
Yes
No
No
No
“!” LED
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Gain <!>
Yes
No
No
Lens
No
Shutter <!>
Yes
No
No
No
No
ND Filter Position
Yes
No
No
No
White Preset <!>
Yes
No
No
Gain Setting
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Run <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Rec/Play Status
Yes
No
No
No
Extender <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Color Temp.
Yes
No
No
No
Filter <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Frame Rate/Interval
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Override <!>
Yes
No
No
No
Battery Remain
Yes
No
No
No
White Switch<B>
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode
Yes
No
No
No
Shockless White
Yes
No
No
No
White Setting
Audio Level Meter
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Speed
Yes
No
No
No
Media Status
Yes
No
No
No
ATW Mode
Yes
No
No
No
SD Card(Utility)
Yes
No
No
No
AWB Fixed Area
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Position
Yes
No
No
No
Filter White Memory
Yes
No
No
No
Iris Position
Yes
No
No
No
Offset White<A>
Yes
No
No
No
Zoom Position
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool <A>
Yes
No
No
No
Offset White
Extender
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool Balance<A>
Yes
No
No
No
ALAC
Yes
No
No
No
Offset White <B>
Yes
No
No
No
AE Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool <B>
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Warm Cool Balance<B>
Yes
No
No
No
No
White Balance Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Shutter
Mode
Yes
Yes
No
CC5600K
Yes
No
No
No
Slow Shutter
Setting
Yes
Yes
No
No
Rec Format
Yes
No
No
No
Number of Frames
Yes
Yes
No
No
Gamma
Yes
No
No
No
Time Zone
Time Zone
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode Lock
Yes
No
No
No
Clip
Clip Naming
Yes
No
No
No
Network Condition
Yes
No
No
No
Title Prefix
Yes
No
No
No
Proxy Status
Yes
No
No
No
Number Set
No
No
No
No
NW Client Mode Status
Yes
No
No
No
Media(A)
–
–
–
–
Streaming Status
Yes
No
No
No
Media(B)
–
–
–
–
GPS
Yes
No
No
No
GPS
GPS
Yes
No
No
No
Planning
Metadata
Load from Media(A)
–
–
–
–
Load from Media(B)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Update Media
Video Signal Monitor
Yes
No
No
No
Clip Name
Yes
No
No
No
Focus Assist Indicator
Yes
No
No
No
Properties
Focus Area Marker
Yes
No
No
No
Clear Memory
–
–
–
–
Lens Info
Yes
No
No
No
Clip Name Disp
Yes
No
No
No
WRR RF Level
Yes
No
No
No
Sort by
Yes
No
No
No
Clip Number
Yes
No
No
No
154
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
USB
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Select Folder
–
–
–
–
View Clip List
–
–
–
–
White
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Color Temp <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Color Temp Balance <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Rename Folder
–
–
–
–
R Gain <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Error Check
Yes
No
No
No
B Gain <A>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Format USB
–
–
–
–
Color Temp <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Copy to USB
–
–
–
–
Color Temp Balance <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Media Remain
–
–
–
–
R Gain <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Gain <B>
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Black
Paint Menu
Flare
Item
Sub-item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Switch Status
Gamma
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
White Clip
No
Yes
No
No
Detail(QFHD)
Yes
Yes
Default
No
HDR Paint
Setting
Sub-item
File type
Detail(HD)
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Aperture
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Flare
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Test Saw
Yes
No
No
No
HLG Look
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Black Offset
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee Point
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Knee Slope
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
HDR Black Compression
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma(HDR)
Gamma
Black Gamma
Knee
White Clip
R Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
B Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Master Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
G Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Flare
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma Select
No
No
No
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Step Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
G Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma Category
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Gamma Select
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Range
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Point
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Slope
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Saturation Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
No
Yes
No
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
155
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Detail(QFHD)
Detail(HD)
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Matrix
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Adaptive Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
H/V Ratio
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Preset Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Crispening
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Preset Select
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level Depend
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level Depend Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Phase
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix R-G
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Knee Aperture Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix R-B
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix G-R
Yes
Yes
Yes
White Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix G-B
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix B-R
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Detail Creation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
User Matrix B-G
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
No
Area Indication
No
No
No
Level
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Color Detection
–
–
–
H/V Ratio
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
No
Reset
–
–
–
–
Multi Matrix
Crispening
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Axis
No
No
No
No
Level Depend
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Hue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
No
Default
No
Level Depend Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Modulation
Knee Aperture
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Master V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Knee Aperture Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
R V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
G V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
White Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
B V Modulation
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Black Limit
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
V Detail Creation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Aperture
Setting
Yes
Yes
Default
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
Skin Detail
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Area Detection
–
–
Low Key
Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation Mode Saturation Mode
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Knee Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Black Gamma
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
–
–
Low Key Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Area Indication
No
No
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Saturation
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Hue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Width
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Range
156
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Noise
Suppression
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
–
–
–
–
Lock All Clips
–
–
–
–
Unlock All Clips
–
–
–
–
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
All Clips
–
–
–
–
Lock/Unlock Clip Select Clip
Gain Link
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
–3dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
0dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
3dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Copy Sub Clip
All Clips
–
–
–
–
6dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Delete Clip
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
9dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
All Clips
–
–
–
–
12dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
18dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
24dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
30dB
Yes
Yes
Yes
36dB
Yes
Yes
42dB
Yes
Yes
Copy Clip
Transfer Clip
All Clips
–
–
–
–
Select Clip
–
–
–
–
No
Transfer
Clip(Proxy)
All Clips
–
–
–
–
Yes
No
Filter Clips
OK
–
–
–
–
Yes
No
NG
–
–
–
–
KEEP
–
–
–
–
None
–
–
–
–
Yes*
Yes
No
No
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Channel Select
Yes
No
Default
No
White H Saw
No
No
No
No
Customize View
Thumbnail Caption
Thumbnail Menu
Item
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
–
–
–
–
–
Set Index Picture –
–
–
–
–
Thumbnail View
Essence Mark Thumbnail
–
–
–
–
Clip Thumbnail
–
–
–
–
Display Clip
Properties
Set Shot Mark
Set Clip Flag
Maintenance Menu
Item
White Shading
Sub-item
File type
Add Shot Mark1
–
–
–
–
White H Para
No
No
No
No
Delete Shot Mark1
–
–
–
–
White V Saw
No
No
No
No
Add Shot Mark2
–
–
–
–
White V Para
No
No
No
No
Delete Shot Mark2
–
–
–
–
White Saw/Para
Yes
No
Default
No
No
Add OK
–
–
–
–
Channel Select
Yes
No
Default
Add NG
–
–
–
–
Black H Saw
No
No
No
No
Add KEEP
–
–
–
–
Black H Para
No
No
No
No
Delete Clip Flag
–
–
–
–
Black V Saw
No
No
No
No
Black V Para
No
No
No
No
Black Shading
157
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Black Shading
Battery
DC Voltage
Alarm
Audio
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Black Saw/Para
Yes
No
Default
No
Master Black
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Audio
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Rear1/WRR Level
Yes
No
No
Lens
No
Rear2/WRR Level
Yes
No
No
No
Master Gain (TMP)
–
–
–
–
Audio CH3 Level
Yes
No
No
No
Near End:Info Battery
Yes
No
No
No
Audio CH4 Level
Yes
No
No
No
End:Info Battery
Yes
No
No
No
WRR Valid CH Sel
Yes
No
No
No
Near End:Sony Battery
Yes
No
No
No
WRR CH Select
No
No
No
No
WRR Setting
End:Sony Battery
Yes
No
No
No
WRR Delay Comp
Yes
No
No
No
Near End:Other Battery
Yes
No
No
No
TX
–
–
–
–
End:Other Battery
Yes
No
No
No
TX Audio Peak
–
–
–
–
Detected Battery
–
–
–
–
TX Input Level
–
–
–
–
DC Low Voltage1
Yes
No
No
No
TX ATT Level
–
–
–
–
DC Low Voltage2
Yes
No
No
No
TX LCF Frequency
–
–
–
–
Front MIC Select
Yes
No
No
No
TX System Delay
Yes
No
No
No
–
Audio CH3/4 Mode
Yes
No
No
No
TX RF Power
–
–
–
Rear XLR Auto
Yes
No
No
No
TX Power Save
–
–
–
–
Front MIC CH1 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
TX-Cam Power Sync
Yes
No
No
No
Front MIC CH2 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
TC Out
Yes
No
No
No
Timecode
Rear MIC CH1 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
DF/NDF
Yes
No
No
No
Rear MIC CH2 Ref
Yes
No
No
No
LTC UBIT
Yes
No
No
No
Line Input Ref
Yes
No
No
No
Counter Display
Yes
No
No
No
Min Alarm Volume
Yes
No
No
No
HDMI TC Out
Yes
No
No
No
Speaker Attenuate
Yes
No
No
No
Essence Mark
Find Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Headphone Out
Yes
No
No
No
Camera Config
HD SDI Remote I/F
Yes
No
No
No
Reference Level
Yes
No
No
No
Color Bars Select
Yes
No
No
No
No
Reference Out
Yes
No
No
No
User Menu Only
Yes
No
No
CH1&2 AGC Mode
Yes
No
No
No
User Menu with Lock
No
No
No
No
CH3&4 AGC Mode
Yes
No
No
No
RM Common Memory
Yes
No
No
No
AGC Spec
Yes
No
No
No
RM Rec Start
Yes
No
No
No
Limiter Mode
Yes
No
No
No
Detail Control(RM/RCP)
Yes
No
No
No
Output Limiter
Yes
No
No
No
SET Key on Thumbnail
Yes
No
No
No
CH1 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
ALAC
Yes
No
No
No
CH2 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
SD HDMI
Yes
No
No
No
HD Modulation
Yes
No
No
No
CH3 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
CH4 Wind Filter
Yes
No
No
No
No
1kHz Tone on Color Bars
Yes
No
No
MIC CH1 Level
Yes
No
No
No
MIC CH2 Level
Yes
No
No
No
158
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Preset White
White Filter
DCC Adjust
Sub-item
File type
Item
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Color Temp <P>
Yes
No
No
No
Color Temp Balance <P>
Yes
No
No
Scene
Reference
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
No
Wi-Fi Mode
Yes*
No
No
No
–
Lens
R Gain <P>
Yes
No
No
No
NFC
–
–
–
Yes
No
No
No
WPS
–
–
–
–
AWB Enable <P>
No
No
No
No
Channel
Yes*
No
No
No
–
ND Filter C.Temp
Yes
No
No
No
SSID & Password
–
–
–
ND FLT C.Temp<1>
Yes
No
No
No
SSID
–
–
–
–
ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>
Yes
No
No
No
Wi-Fi Station Remote
Yes*
No
No
No
Electrical CC<A>
Yes
No
No
No
Wi-Fi
Station
Detail
Settings
Scan Networks
–
–
–
–
SSID
No
No
No
No
Password
No
No
No
No
DHCP
Yes*
No
No
No
Electrical CC<B>
Yes
No
No
No
Electrical CC<C>
Yes
No
No
No
Electrical CC<D>
Yes
No
No
No
DCC Function Select
Yes
No
No
No
IP Address
Yes*
No
No
No
DCC D Range
Yes
No
No
No
Subnet Mask
Yes*
No
No
No
DCC Point
Yes
No
No
No
Gateway
Yes*
No
No
No
DCC Gain
Yes
No
No
No
DNS Auto
Yes*
No
No
No
DCC Delay Time
Yes
No
No
No
Primary DNS
Server
Yes*
No
No
No
Secondary DNS
Server
Yes*
No
No
No
Device Name (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
IP Address (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
MAC Address (Wi-Fi)
–
–
–
–
DCC Peak Filter
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Frequency
Yes
No
No
No
Genlock
Genlock
Yes
No
No
No
Reference
–
–
–
–
Auto Black Shading
–
–
–
–
Reset Black Shading
–
–
–
–
Master Gain (TMP)
–
–
–
–
APR
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
Setup for Mobile Setup
App
–
–
–
–
Access
Authentication
Network
B Gain <P>
Mode
APR
File type
All
Flicker Reduce
Auto Shading
Sub-item
User Name
No
No
No
Regenerate Password
–
–
–
–
Yes*
No
No
No
Modem Remote
–
–
–
–
Public Key Creation
–
–
–
–
Public Key Clear
–
–
–
–
No
Create Key Date
–
–
–
–
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
Modem
Password
No
No
No
No
Wired LAN
Generate Password
–
–
–
–
Wired LAN Remote
Show Settings
–
–
–
–
159
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
Item
Network
Network Client
Mode
Sub-item
Wired
LAN
Detail
Settings
File type
Scene
Reference
Lens
DHCP
Yes*
No
No
No
IP Address
Yes*
No
No
Subnet Mask
Yes*
No
Gateway
Yes*
No
DNS Auto
Yes*
Primary DNS
Server
Secondary DNS
Server
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Setting
No
No
No
No
No
Preset Select
Yes*
No
No
No
No
No
Preset1
Size
Yes*
No
No
No
No
No
Bit Rate
Yes*
No
No
No
No
No
No
Type
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
Destination
Address
Yes*
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
Destination Port
Yes*
No
No
No
Streaming
Preset2
Lens
Same as Preset1
Setting
Yes*
No
No
No
Preset3
Preset
Select
Yes*
No
No
No
Audio Channel
Yes*
No
No
Date Mode
Yes
No
No
No
12H/24H
Yes
No
No
No
Date
–
–
–
–
Time
–
–
–
–
Language
Select
Yes
No
No
No
Hours Meter
Hours (System)
–
–
–
–
Hours (Reset)
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
Network Reset
Reset
–
–
–
–
Fan Control
Setting
Yes
No
No
No
–
VF Display
Setting
Chara/Marker Brightness
Yes
No
No
No
Version
Preset 1
Display Name
Yes*
No
No
No
CCM Address
Yes*
No
No
No
CCM Port
Yes*
No
No
No
User Name
No
No
No
No
Password
No
No
No
No
NCM with Proxy
Yes*
No
No
No
Camera Control
Yes*
No
No
No
Camera Setting
No
No
No
No
Preset 2
Same as Preset 1
Preset 3
File Transfer
Item
All
File Transfer
Same as Preset 1
–
–
–
Clock Set
Same as Preset1
No
Remote File Transfer
Yes*
No
No
No
Number
–
–
–
–
Auto Upload (Proxy)
Yes*
No
No
No
Version Up
–
–
–
–
Default Upload Server
Yes*
No
No
No
Net-Func Version Number
–
–
–
–
Clear Completed Jobs
–
–
–
–
Net-Func Ver.Up
–
–
–
–
Clear All Jobs
–
–
–
–
View Job List
–
–
–
–
160
11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data
File Menu
Item
User File
All File
Scene File
Reference File
Item
Sub-item
Lens File
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
No
No
No
Recall User Preset
–
–
–
–
Store User Preset
–
–
–
–
Clear User Preset
–
–
–
–
Sub-item
File type
All
Scene
Reference
Lens
Display Mode
No
No
No
No
Recall Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Store Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
File ID
No
No
No
Yes
File Source
–
–
–
–
Clear Lens Offset
–
–
–
–
Lens Auto Recall
Yes
No
No
No
Load Customize Data
Yes
No
No
No
Lens Serial Number
–
–
–
–
Load White Data
Yes
No
No
No
Lens Name
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Lens Manufacturer
–
–
–
–
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
Master V Modulation
No
No
No
Yes
File ID
Yes
No
No
No
Lens Center H
No
No
No
Yes
All Preset
–
–
–
–
Lens Center V
No
No
No
Yes
Store All Preset
–
–
–
–
R Flare
No
No
No
Yes
Clear All Preset
–
–
–
–
G Flare
No
No
No
Yes
3Sec Clear Preset
No
No
No
No
B Flare
No
No
No
Yes
Recall Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
White Offset R
No
No
No
Yes
Store Internal Memory
–
–
–
–
White Offset B
No
No
No
Yes
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
Shading Ch Select
Yes
No
No
No
Save SD Card
–
–
–
–
Shading H SAW
No
No
No
Yes
File ID
No
Yes
No
No
Shading H PARA
No
No
No
Yes
Scene White Data
Yes
No
No
No
Shading V SAW
No
No
No
Yes
Store Reference
–
–
–
–
Clear Reference
–
–
–
–
Load Reference(SD Card)
–
–
–
Save Reference(SD Card)
–
–
File ID
No
No
Shading V PARA
No
No
No
Yes
Current Settings
–
–
–
–
–
Load SD Card
–
–
–
–
–
–
Reset
–
–
–
–
Yes
No
User Gamma
161
11. Appendix
Special Recording Support by Recording Format
Special recording 1)
Format
QFHD
XAVC-I QFHD
exFAT
XAVC-L QFHD
HD
XAVC-I HD
exFAT
XAVC-L 50
Normal recording
Picture Cache
Rec
Interval Rec
Slow & Quick
Motion
Clip Continuous
Rec
2-slot Simul Rec
1-slot Simul Rec
1-Slot Simul Rec +
Picture Cache
Rec
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes 2)
2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
XAVC-L 35
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
XAVC-L 25
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
MPEG HD420 HQ
UDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
exFAT
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
–
–
UDF
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
FAT
MPEG HD420 SP
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
–
–
–
1) For details about supported image size, frame rate, and functions, see “Advanced Operations” (page 46).
Only one special recording function can be used at any one time.
2) The format of subclips recorded simultaneously is MPEG HD422 or XAVC-L50.
162
11. Appendix
Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings
Operation >Format in the setup menu
Frequency
Rec Format
59.94
50
29.97
25
23.98
Cache Rec Time
0–2 sec
2–4 sec
4–6 sec
6–8 sec
8–10 sec
10–12 sec
12–14 sec
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
13–15 sec
–
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-I 1920×1080i
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-L 200 2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-L 50/35/25
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ/SP
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-I 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-I 1920×1080P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XAVC-L 50/35
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD422
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MPEG HD420 HQ
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
[Note]
In 1-slot Simul Rec mode, the maximum value of Cache Rec Time is 6 to 8 seconds when Rec Format is XAVC-I 59.94/50. In all other cases, 13 to 15 seconds.
163
11. Appendix
Media Recording and Playback Time
[Note]
The recording and playback times are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded.
Format
XAVC Intra
No. of pixels/Frame rate
Maximum bit rate
SBP-240F
SBS-128G1C
3840×2160 / 59.94P
600 Mbps
Approx. 45 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 50P
500 Mbps
Approx. 53 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 29.97P
300 Mbps
Approx. 88 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 25P
250 Mbps
Approx. 105 minutes
–
3840×2160 / 23.98P
240 Mbps
Approx. 110 minutes
–
1920×1080 / 59.94P, 50P
222 Mbps
Approx. 115 minutes
Approx. 57 minutes
1920×1080 / 29.97P, 25P, 59.94i, 50i
111 Mbps
Approx. 220 minutes
Approx. 105 minutes
1920×1080 / 23.98P
89 Mbps
Approx. 270 minutes
Approx. 135 minutes
XAVC-L200
3840×2160 / 59.94P, 50P
200 Mbps
Approx. 130 minutes
–
XAVC-L QFHD
3840×2160 / 59.94P, 50P
150 Mbps
Approx. 175 minutes
Approx. 86 minutes
3840×2160 / 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
100 Mbps
Approx. 255 minutes
Approx. 125 minutes
XAVC-L 50
–
50 Mbps
Approx. 470 minutes
Approx. 230 minutes
XAVC-L 35
–
35 Mbps
Approx. 635 minutes
Approx. 315 minutes
XAVC-L 25
–
25 Mbps
Approx. 850 minutes
Approx. 420 minutes
MPEG HD422
–
50 Mbps
Approx. 445 minutes
Approx. 220 minutes
MPEG HD420 HQ
–
35 Mbps
Approx. 685 minutes
Approx. 340 minutes
XAVC-I QFHD
XAVC-I HD
XAVC Long
MPEG-2 Long GOP
Recording/playback time
164
11. Appendix
Usage Precautions
The fan and battery are consumable parts that
will need periodic replacement.
When operating at room temperature, a
normal replacement cycle will be about
5 years.
However, this replacement cycle represents
only a general guideline and does not imply
that the life expectancy of these parts is
guaranteed. For details on parts replacement,
contact your dealer.
The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the
electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under
normal operating temperatures and normal
usage (8 hours per day; 25 days per month).
If usage exceeds the above normal usage
frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced
correspondingly.
Use and storage
Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks
ˎˎThe internal mechanism may be damaged
or the body warped.
ˎˎIf an accessory mounted on the accessory
shoe is subjected to severe shock, the
accessory shoe may be damaged. In such a
case, stop using it and contact your dealer
or a Sony service representative.
Do not cover the camcorder while operating
Putting a cloth, for example, over the
camcorder can cause excessive internal heat
build-up.
After use
Always turn off the POWER switch.
Before storing the camcorder for a long period
Remove the battery pack.
Shipping
ˎˎRemove the media before transporting the
camcorder.
ˎˎIf sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air,
or other transportation service, pack it in the
shipping carton of the camcorder.
Care of the camcorder
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the
lenses or optical filters using a blower.
Do not attempt to clean the interior of the
camera using a blower. Any dust particles in
the air that enter components may cause a
malfunction.
If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it
with a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a
cloth moistened in a little neutral detergent,
then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents
such as alcohol or thinners, as these may
cause discoloration or other damage to the
finish of the camcorder.
In the event of operating problems
If you should experience problems with
the camcorder, contact a Sony service
representative.
Do not place this product close to medical
devices
This product (including accessories)
has magnet(s) which may interfere with
pacemakers, programmable shunt valves for
hydrocephalus treatment, or other medical
devices. Do not place this product close to
persons who use such medical devices.
Consult your doctor before using this product
if you use any such medical device.
Use and storage locations
Store in a level, ventilated place.
Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the
following places.
ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating
temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to
104 °F))
Remember that in summer in warm climates
the temperature inside a car with the
windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C
(122 °F).
ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations
ˎˎLocations where the camcorder may be
exposed to rain
ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration
ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields
ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing
strong electromagnetic fields.
ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for
extended periods
To prevent electromagnetic interference from
portable communications devices
The use of portable telephones and other
communications devices near this camcorder
can result in malfunction and interference with
audio and video signals.
It is recommended that the portable
communications devices near this camcorder
be powered off.
Note on laser beams
Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes
a laser beam, be careful not to expose the
CMOS image sensor to the laser beam or any
reflected light and scattered light from the
laser beam.
Condensation
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to
a warm location, or if ambient temperature
suddenly rises, moisture may form on the
outer surface of the unit and/or inside of
the unit. This is known as condensation. If
condensation occurs, turn off the unit and
wait until the condensation clears before
operating the unit. Operating the unit while
condensation is present may damage the unit.
Fitting the zoom lens
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as
otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer
to the section “Mounting and Adjusting the
Lens” (page 24).
Viewfinder
Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece
lens pointing directly at the sun.
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s
rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder.
About the LCD panels
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is
manufactured with high precision technology,
giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least
99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels
may be “stuck”, either always off (black),
always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In
addition, over a long period of use, because
of the physical characteristics of the liquid
crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may appear
spontaneously. These problems are not a
malfunction. Note that any such problems
have no effect on recorded data.
Camera CMOS image sensor
phenomena
[Note]
The following phenomena that may appear in images
are specific to image sensors. They do not indicate a
malfunction.
165
11. Appendix: Usage Precautions
White flecks
Although the image sensors are produced
with high-precision technologies, fine white
flecks may be generated on the screen in
rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is
related to the principle of image sensors and
is not a malfunction.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in
the following cases:
ˎˎWhen operating at a high environmental
temperature
ˎˎWhen you have raised the gain (sensitivity)
The problem may be alleviated by executing
automatic black balance adjustment.
Flicker
If shooting under lighting produced by
fluorescent lights, sodium lamps, mercuryvapor lamps, or LEDs, the screen may flicker.
Fragmentation
If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced
properly, try formatting the recording media.
While repeating picture recording/playback
with a certain recording media for an
extended period, files in the media may be
fragmented, disabling proper recording/
storage. In such a case, make a backup of
clips in the media then perform formatting
of the media using Operation >Format Media
(page 94) in the setup menu.
Notes on security
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE
TO IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY
MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES,
UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING
FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR
SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.
ˎˎDepending on the operating environment,
unauthorized third parties on the network
may be able to access the unit. When
connecting the unit to the network, be sure
to confirm that the network is protected
securely.
ˎˎCommunication content may be
unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized
third parties in the vicinity of the signals.
When using wireless LAN communication,
implement security measures properly to
protect the communication content.
ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using
the unit connected with the network, it
is strongly recommended to access the
Control window via a Web browser and
change the access limitation settings from
the factory preset values (page 73).
Also, it is recommended that you set a
password with a sufficiently long character
string that is hard to guess by others, and
that you store it safely.
ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the
Web browser while making settings or after
making settings.
Since the login status remains in the Web
browser, close the Web browser when
you complete the settings to prevent
unauthorized third parties from using the
unit or harmful programs from running.
About GPS
The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a
system that calculates geographical location
from highly accurate US space satellites. This
system allows you to pinpoint your exact
location on the earth.
The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits,
20,000 km above the earth. The GPS system
consists of 24 or more GPS satellites.
A GPS receiver receives radio signals from
the satellites, and calculates the current
location of the receiver based on the orbital
information (almanac data) and travel time of
the signals, etc.
Determining a location is called
“triangulating.” A GPS receiver can determine
the location’s latitude and longitude by
receiving signals from 3 or more satellites.
ˎˎAs the positions of GPS satellites vary
constantly, it may take longer to determine
the location or the receiver may not be able
to determine the location at all, depending
on the location and time you use the
camcorder.
ˎˎ“GPS” is a system for determining
geographic location by triangulating radio
signals from GPS satellites. Avoid using
the camcorder in places where radio
signals are blocked or reflected, such as a
shadowy place surrounded by buildings or
trees, etc. Use the camcorder in open sky
environments.
ˎˎYou may not be able to record location
information at locations or in situations
where radio signals from the GPS satellites
do not reach the camcorder as follows.
‒‒ In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of
buildings.
‒‒ Between tall buildings or at narrow
streets surrounded by buildings.
‒‒ In underground locations, locations
surrounded by dense trees, under an
elevated bridge, or in locations where
magnetic fields are generated, such as
near high voltage cables.
‒‒ Near devices that generate radio signals
of the same frequency band as the
camcorder: near 1.5 GHz band mobile
telephones, etc.
ˎˎIf you upload and share the images which
are recorded when the setting “GPS” is
”On,” the record location may be exposed
on the Internet even if you do not intend
to do so. If you do not want to record
location information, select “Off” for “GPS”
(page 100).
On triangulating errors
ˎˎIf you move to another location right after
setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may
take a longer time for the camcorder to start
triangulating, compared to when you stay in
the same place.
ˎˎError caused by the position of GPS satellites
The camcorder automatically triangulates
your current location when the camcorder
receives radio signals from 3 or more GPS
satellites.
The triangulating error allowed by the GPS
satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending
on the environment of the location, the
triangulating error can be greater. In this
case, your actual location may not match
the location on the map based on the
GPS information. Meanwhile, the GPS
satellites are controlled by the United States
Department of Defense, and the degree of
accuracy may be changed intentionally.
ˎˎError during the triangulating process
The camcorder acquires location information
periodically during triangulating.
On the restriction of use of GPS
Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of
the situation, the countries/regions of use.
On the geographic coordinate system
The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system
is used.
11. Appendix
Specifications
General
150 (6)
Mass
Approx. 3.8 kg (8 lb 6 oz) (body only)
Dimensions
(Unit: mm (inch), excluding
protrusions, body only)1)
269 (10 5/8)
166
332 (13 1/8)
1) The values for dimensions are approximate.
Power requirements
12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC
Power consumption
Approx. 41 W (body only, when
recording in XAVC-I, with LCD
monitor on)
Approx. 37 W (body only, when
recording in XAVC-I, with LCD
monitor on, SDI/HDMI output
setting OFF)
Approx. 50 W (HDVF-EL20
viewfinder, lens, microphone,
when recording in XAVC-I, with
LCD monitor on)
Approx. 32 W (when copying to USB
media)
[Notes]
ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption
of 50 W or greater.
When a 50 W video light is connected:
‒‒ Do not connect other peripherals to output terminals.
‒‒ Use it under the following conditions.
Attach lens only, XAVC-I HD recording format, proxy
recording OFF, SDI/HDMI output setting OFF
ˎˎ When using a battery (BP-GL95B), do not allow the
total power consumption of connected peripherals to
exceed 43 W.
ˎˎ When using the AC-DN10A, do not allow the total
power consumption of connected peripherals to
exceed 38 W.
ˎˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of
1.8 A or lower to the DC OUT connector.
Operating temperature
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
Storage temperature
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F)
File system
exFAT, UDF, FAT
Continuous operating time
Approx. 110 minutes (using
BP‑GL95B)
Recording format (video)
XAVC Intra
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-I QFHD: VBR, 600 Mbps (max)
XAVC-I HD: CBG, 223 Mbps (max)
XAVC Long
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
XAVC-L QFHD: VBR, 150 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L200: VBR, 200 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 50: VBR, 50 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 35: VBR, 35 Mbps (max)
XAVC-L 25: VBR, 25 Mbps (max)
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422: CBR, 50 Mbps,
MPEG-2 422P@HL
MPEG HD420 HQ: VBR, 35 Mbps
(max), MPEG-2 MP@HL
MPEG HD420 SP: CBR, 25 Mbps,
MPEG-2 MP@H-14
XAVC Proxy
AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long
GOP
1920×1080: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps
1280×720: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps
640×360: 3 Mbps
480×270: 1 Mbps, 500 kbps (VBR)
Recording format (audio)
XAVC Intra
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Long
LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz,
4-channel
MPEG HD420 HQ: LPCM 16-bit,
48 kHz, 4-channel
XAVC Proxy
AAC-LC, 128 kbps, 2-channel
Recording/playback time
See “Media Recording and Playback Time”
(page 163).
Recording frame rate
XAVC Intra
XAVC-I QFHD
3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
XAVC-I HD
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
XAVC Long
XAVC-L QFHD
3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
XAVC-L200
3840×2160/59.94P, 50P
XAVC-L 50
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
XAVC-L 35
1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
XAVC-L 25
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i
MPEG-2 Long GOP
MPEG HD422
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
MPEG HD420 HQ
1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 25P,
23.98P
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
1280×720/59.94P, 50P
MPEG HD420 SP
1440×1080/59.94i, 50i
XAVC Proxy
Main line 1920×1080: 59.94i, 50i,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P,
29.97P, 25P, 23.98P
Input/Output Section
Inputs
GENLOCK IN:
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
unbalanced
TC IN:
BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10
kilohms
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2:
XLR type, 3-pin, female
LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V
switchable
LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu
AES/EBU: AES3 compliant
MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu
MIC IN:
XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to
–30 dBu
WRR:
D-sub 15-pin
Analog CH1: –40 dBu
Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS
SDI IN:
SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard
compliant
4-channel audio
167
11. Appendix: Specifications
Outputs
SYNC OUT:
BNC type
SDI OUT 1/2:
BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced
(12G/3G/1.5G switchable)
SMPTE ST424/425, ST292-1/259
standard compliant
4-channel audio
AUDIO OUT:
XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu
(balanced)
TC OUT: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 50 ohms
EARPHONE (stereo, minijack):
–12 dBu (reference level output,
maximum monitor volume,
16‑ohm load)
HDMI:
Type A, 19-pin
Other
DC IN:
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V
DC
DC OUT: Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC,
1.8 A maximum rated current
LENS:
12-pin, lens power source (11 V to
17 V DC, 1.0 A maximum rated
current)
REMOTE: 8-pin
LIGHT:
2-pin
USB:
4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B)
VF:
Round type 20-pin
Network connector:
RJ-45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE
802.3u), 10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3)
ND filters 1: Clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/16 ND
4: 1/64 ND
Sensitivity F10 (system frequency: 59.94i)
(Typical)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance,
3200K, High Sense Mode OFF)
F12 (system frequency: 59.94i) (High
Sense Mode ON) (Typical)
(2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance,
3200K)
Minimum illumination
0.019 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame
accumulation)
Image S/N ratio
HD: 62 dB (1920×1080 59.94i, Noise
Suppression on, High Sense
Mode OFF) (Typical)
4K: 60 dB (3840×2160 59.94P, Noise
Suppression on, High Sense
Mode OFF) (Typical)
Horizontal resolution
2000 TVL (TV lines) or higher
(3840×2160P)
Black level
3 ± 1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup
menu)
Shutter speed
59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec.
29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec.
25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec.
23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec.
Shutter
2 to 8, 16 frames
Dynamic range
600% (SDR mode)
1300% (HDR mode)
Camera Section
Imaging element
2/3-inch type, “Exmor” CMOS image
sensor
Quantization
16/24-bit
Headroom
20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16,
12 dB), EBUL
Frequency response
20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less)
Dynamic range
90 dB (typical)
Distortion 0.08% or lower (+4 dBu input level)
Built-in speaker
Monaural, 500 mW output
Display Section
LCD monitor
Screen size
8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal
Aspect ratio
16:9
Number of pixels
960 (H) × 540 (V)
Media Section
SxS card slots
Form factor: Express Card/34
Number of slots: 2
Connector: PCMCIA Express Card
compliant
Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher
Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher
SD card slots
Proxy (1), Utility (1)
Supplied Accessories
Shoulder belt (1)
Cold shoe kit (1)
Lens mount cap
USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3)
Protective cap (1)
Guard (1)
Before Using This Unit (1)
Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1)
Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment
chart (1)
Related Equipment
Power supply and related equipment
AC adaptor
AC-DN10A
Battery pack
BP-GL95B
Battery charger
BC-L70A
Lens, viewfinder and related equipment
Lens
2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only
Viewfinder
HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder rotation bracket
BKW-401
Equipment for remote control
Audio Section
Remote control unit
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
Sampling frequency
48 kHz
[Note]
Command network unit (CNU) is not supported.
168
11. Appendix: Specifications
HD camera adaptor
CA-FB70/TX70
[Notes]
ˎˎ Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the
Japanese model only.
ˎˎ If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use
an L-shaped adaptor.
Media adaptor
MEAD-SD02 (for SD cards)
Recording media
SxS memory cards
SxS PRO X series
SxS PRO+ series
SxS PRO series
SxS-1 series
Audio equipment
Microphone
ECM-678/674/673/680S
Microphone holder
CAC-12
Digital wireless receiver
DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D
UHF synthesized tuner unit
URX-S03D
Other peripheral devices
Tripod attachment
VCT-14/U14
Video light
UC-D200A (Nippon Video System NIPROS)
Ultralight (Anton Bauer)
Pad
CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad
Wireless LAN adaptor
CBK-WA02
Network adaptor kit
CBK-NA1
USB adaptor
CBK-DL1
Products for maintenance, ease of use/
handling
Attachment bracket
A-2092-367Design and specifications are subject to
change without notice.
Notes
ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify
that it was recorded successfully.
SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT
OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD
CONTENT OF ANY TYPE.
ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT
BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON
ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR
PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF
THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY
PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
WHATSOEVER.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT
OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS,
REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA
OR STORAGE SYSTEMS.
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF
ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT
MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF
ANY KIND.
Software Downloads
When the unit is used with a PC connection,
download any device drivers, plug-ins, and
application software you require from the
following websites.
Sony Professional products website:
Japan https://www.sony.jp/professional/
All other countries
https://pro.sony/ (click [Change
Country, Region or Language] at the
bottom of the page and select the
region and language)
Sony Creative Software, software download
page:
http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/
download/software_for_sony_equipment
169
11. Appendix: Specifications
Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories
ECM-680S/678/674/673
Microphone
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio
License
4K monitor/HD monitor
CAC-12
Microphone holder
HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30
Viewfinder
URX-S03D
UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit
DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless
Receiver
SxS memory cards
SBS-32G1C, SBS-64G1C, SBS-128G1C,
SBP-64E, SBP-128E, SBP-256E, SBP-120F,
SBP-240F
MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor
PXW-Z750
RM-B170
RCP-1000/1500/1530
RCP-1001/1501
Remote Control Unit
CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor a)
CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor a)
VCT-14
Tripod attachment
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER
USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE
REMUNERATION TO
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM
A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO.
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG
LA, L.L.C.
SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE
CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS
EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA,
YOU MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights
and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or
its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and
their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with
any updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed,
on-line or other electronic documentation for such
software, and any data files created by operation of such
software (collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in
the SOFTWARE having a separate end user license
agreement (including, but not limited to, GNU General
Public license and Lesser/Library General Public License)
shall be covered by such applicable separate end user
license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to
the extent required by such separate end user license
agreement (“EXCLUDED SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is
protected by copyright and other intellectual property
laws and international treaties.
BP-GL95B
Battery Pack
BC-L70A
Battery Charger
AC-DN10A
AC Adaptor
a) Connection of a camera adaptor is supported on the Japanese model only.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including,
but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation,
video, audio, music, text and “applets” incorporated into
the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the
THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE
solely in connection with the camcorder and only
for your individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest
(including, but not limited to, all intellectual property
rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that this EULA does not
specifically grant to you.
170
11. Appendix: Specifications
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt
to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE,
whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative
works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative
works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE.
You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights
management functionality of the SOFTWARE. You
may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of
the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any
mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You
may not separate any individual component of the
SOFTWARE for use on more than one camcorder unless
expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may not
remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks or notices
on the SOFTWARE. You may not share, distribute, rent,
lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the SOFTWARE.
The software, network services or other products
other than SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARE’S
performance depends might be interrupted or
discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers (software
suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such
suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE, network
services, contents or other products will continue to
be available, or will operate without interruption or
modification.
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant,
you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE
may be covered by open source software licenses
(“Open Source Components”), which means any
software licenses approved as open source licenses by
the Open Source Initiative or any substantially similar
licenses, including but not limited to any license that,
as a condition of distribution of the software licensed
under such license, requires that the distributor make
the software available in source code format. If and to
the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony.
com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list
of applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in
the SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable
terms and conditions governing its use. Such terms
and conditions may be changed by the applicable
third party at any time without liability to you. To the
extent required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will apply in lieu
of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the terms of the
licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit
any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to such
EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply
to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms
of the licenses applicable to Open Source Components
require SONY to make an offer to provide source code
in connection with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby
made.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
MATERIALS
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you
to view, store, process and/or use content created by
you and/or third parties. Such content may be protected
by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/
or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only
in compliance with all such laws and agreements that
apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree
that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect
the copyright of content stored, processed or used by
the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not
limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and
restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal
to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and
termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate
use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE
DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE
THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT
SERVICE”). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT
SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS,
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE LIMITED. You
acknowledge and agree that certain content and
services available through the SOFTWARE may be
provided by third parties over which SONY has no
control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY
SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection
for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are
solely responsible for payment of any third party fees
associated with your Internet connection, including
but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime
charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited
or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth
or technical limitations of your Internet connection
and service. The provision, quality and security of such
Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the
third party providing such service.
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable export and reexport restrictions and regulations of the area or country
in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize
the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country
or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or
regulations.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed,
manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line
control equipment in hazardous environments requiring
fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of
nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication
systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines,
or weapons systems, in which the failure of the
SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, or
severe physical or environmental damage (“HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS,
and each of their respective affiliates specifically
disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or
condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE
is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use
of the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,”
without warranty, duty or condition of any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
(for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of
the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively
referred to as “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY
DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS
OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE FUNCTIONS
CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE UPDATED, (B)
THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL
BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS
WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL
NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR
DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER
THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S
PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE
AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND
(E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE
OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS,
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR
IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY.
SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for
purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as
“SONY”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER
ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR
ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE,
EACH AND ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER
ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO
THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL
INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA
SECURITY
You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its
affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect,
transfer, process and store certain information collected
from the SOFTWARE, including but not limited to
information about (i) the SOFTWARE and (ii) the
software applications, contents and peripheral devices
that interact with your camcorder and the SOFTWARE
(“Information”). Information includes, but is not limited
to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder and
its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the
SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations
of your camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software
applications, contents and peripheral devices that
interact with the camcorder and the SOFTWARE;
(4) use and frequency of use of the functions of (x)
the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software applications,
contents and peripheral devices that interact with the
171
11. Appendix: Specifications
SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated below.
SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use
and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in
order to improve its products and services or to provide
products or services to you. Such uses include, but
are not limited to: (a) administering the functionalities
of the SOFTWARE; (b) to improve, service, update or
upgrade the SOFTWARE; (c) improving, developing and
enhancing the current and future products and services
of SONY and other parties; (d) to provide you with
information about the products and services offered by
SONY and other parties; (e) complying with applicable
laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent offered,
providing you with location-based services of SONY
and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY
retains the right to use Information to protect itself and
third parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct.
Certain services available through the SOFTWARE
may rely upon location information, including, but not
limited to, the geographic location of the camcorder.
You acknowledge that for the purpose of providing
such services, SONY, the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or
their partners may collect, archive, process and use such
location data, and that such services are governed by
the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. By using
any such services, you agree that you have reviewed the
privacy policies applicable to such services and consent
to such activities.
SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not
intentionally use Information to personally identify
the owner or user of the SOFTWARE without your
knowledge or consent. Any use of Information will be
in accordance with the privacy policies of SONY or such
third party. Please contact applicable contact address of
each area or country for SONY’s current privacy policy.
Please contact applicable third parties for privacy
policies relating to personally identifiable and other
information you provide when you use or access third
party software or services.
Information may be processed, stored or transferred
to SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in
countries outside of your country of residence. Data
protection and information privacy laws in certain
countries may not offer the same level of protection
as your country of residence and you may have fewer
legal rights in relation to Information processed and
stored in, or transferred to, such countries. SONY will
use reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical and
organizational steps to prevent unauthorized access to
or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it will
eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS
may automatically update or otherwise modify the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes
of enhancement of security functions, error correction
and improvement of functions, at such time as you
interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or
otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete
or change the nature of features or other aspects of the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you
may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such
activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that
SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE
upon your complete installation or acceptance of such
update or modifications. Any updates/modifications
shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the
SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of
this EULA, you consent to such update/ modification.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended
and modified from time to time, together constitute the
entire agreement between you and SONY with respect
to the SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or
enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not
constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part
of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable,
that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent
permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA,
and the other parts will remain in full force and effect.
GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan,
without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any
dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the
exclusive venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan, and
the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction
of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the
contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation
of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause
irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages
would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY
obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY
deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances.
SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies
to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA,
including, but not limited to, immediate termination of
your use of the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole
discretion that you are violating or intend to violate
this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other
remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under
contract.
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may
terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its
terms. In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease
all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii)
comply with the requirements in the section below
entitled “Your Account Responsibilities”.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY
POSTING NOTICE ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY
EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED
BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE
PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN UPGRADES/ UPDATES
OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you
should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your
continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date
of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to
be bound by such amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended
third-party beneficiary of, and shall have the right to
enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the
SOFTWARE of such party.
Should you have any questions concerning this EULA,
you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable
contact address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation.
Open Source Software Licenses
On the basis of license contracts between
Sony and the software copyright holders, this
product uses open software.
To meet the requirements of the software
copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform
you of the content of these licenses.
For the content of these licenses, see
“License1.pdf” in the “License” folder of the
supplied CD‑ROM.
172
11. Appendix: Specifications
Trademarks
ˎˎXDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
are registered trademarks of
ˎˎXAVC and
Sony Corporation.
ˎˎAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Google, Inc.
ˎˎMicrosoft and Windows are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
ˎˎApple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and
their logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the US
and other countries.
ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the
United States and other countries.
ˎˎWi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
Setup are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
ˎˎThe N-Mark is a trademark or registered
trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United
States and in other countries.
ˎˎQR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
ˎˎAll system names and product names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of
their respective owners. Trademarked items
are not indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this
document.
">